-- vim: tw=78

--- @class vim.option_meta
--- @field full_name string
--- @field desc? string
--- @field abbreviation? string
--- @field alias? string|string[]
--- @field short_desc? string|fun(): string
--- @field varname? string
--- @field flags_varname? string
--- @field type vim.option_type
--- @field immutable? boolean
--- @field list? 'comma'|'onecomma'|'commacolon'|'onecommacolon'|'flags'|'flagscomma'
--- @field scope vim.option_scope[]
--- @field deny_duplicates? boolean
--- @field enable_if? string
--- @field defaults? vim.option_defaults|vim.option_value|fun(): string
--- @field values? vim.option_valid_values
--- @field flags? true|table<string,integer>
--- @field secure? true
--- @field noglob? true
--- @field normal_fname_chars? true
--- @field pri_mkrc? true
--- @field normal_dname_chars? true
--- @field modelineexpr? true
--- @field func? true
--- @field expand? string|true
--- @field nodefault? true
--- @field no_mkrc? true
--- @field alloced? true
--- @field redraw? vim.option_redraw[]
---
--- If not provided and `values` is present, then is set to 'did_set_str_generic'
--- @field cb? string
---
--- If not provided and `values` is present, then is set to 'expand_set_str_generic'
--- @field expand_cb? string
--- @field tags? string[]

--- @class vim.option_defaults
--- @field condition? string
---    string: #ifdef string
---    !string: #ifndef string
--- @field if_true vim.option_value|fun(): string
--- @field if_false? vim.option_value
--- @field doc? string Default to show in options.txt
--- @field meta? string Default to use in Lua meta files

--- @alias vim.option_scope 'global'|'buf'|'win'
--- @alias vim.option_type 'boolean'|'number'|'string'
--- @alias vim.option_value boolean|integer|string
--- @alias vim.option_valid_values (string|[string,vim.option_valid_values])[]

--- @alias vim.option_redraw
--- |'statuslines'
--- |'tabline'
--- |'current_window'
--- |'current_buffer'
--- |'all_windows'
--- |'curswant'
--- |'highlight_only'
--- |'ui_option'

--- @param s string
--- @return string
local function cstr(s)
  return '"' .. s:gsub('["\\]', '\\%0'):gsub('\t', '\\t') .. '"'
end

--- @param s string
--- @param t vim.option_type
--- @return fun(): string, vim.option_type
local function macros(s, t)
  return function()
    return s, t
  end
end

--- @param s string
--- @return fun(): string
local function N_(s) -- luacheck: ignore 211 (currently unused)
  return function()
    return 'N_(' .. cstr(s) .. ')'
  end
end

-- luacheck: ignore 621
local options = {
  cstr = cstr,
  --- @type string[]
  valid_scopes = { 'global', 'buf', 'win' },
  --- @type vim.option_meta[]
  --- The order of the options MUST be alphabetic for ":set all".
  options = {
    {
      abbreviation = 'al',
      defaults = 224,
      full_name = 'aleph',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('ASCII code of the letter Aleph (Hebrew)'),
      type = 'number',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ari',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Allow CTRL-_ in Insert mode.  This is default off, to avoid that users
        that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get into reverse
        Insert mode, and don't know how to get out.  See 'revins'.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'allowrevins',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('allow CTRL-_ in Insert mode'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ari',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ambw',
      cb = 'did_set_ambiwidth',
      defaults = 'single',
      values = { 'single', 'double' },
      desc = [=[
        Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
        Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
        letters, Cyrillic letters).

        There are currently two possible values:
        "single":	Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII.  This is
        		expected by most users.
        "double":	Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
        						*E834* *E835*
        The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
        contains a character that would be double width.  These errors may
        also be given when calling setcellwidths().

        The values are overruled for characters specified with
        |setcellwidths()|.

        There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
        those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
        legacy/traditional CJK encodings.  In those encodings, Euro,
        Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
        therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them.  This is also
        true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
        file.  Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or
        Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
        (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
        this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
        by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font.  Perhaps it also has
        to be set to "double" under CJK MS-Windows when the system locale is
        set to one of CJK locales.  See Unicode Standard Annex #11
        (https://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'ambiwidth',
      redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('what to do with Unicode chars of ambiguous width'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ambw',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'arab',
      cb = 'did_set_arabic',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
        Setting this option will:
        - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
        - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
        - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
          between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
        - Set the 'delcombine' option

        Resetting this option will:
        - Reset the 'rightleft' option.
        - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
        Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
        option).
        Also see |l10n-arabic.txt|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'arabic',
      redraw = { 'curswant' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('Arabic as a default second language'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'arshape',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
        corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
        take effect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
        one which encompasses:
          a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
             within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
          b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
          c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
        When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone
        form.
        Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
        further details see |l10n-arabic.txt|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'arabicshape',
      redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('do shaping for Arabic characters'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_arshape',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'acd',
      cb = 'did_set_autochdir',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you
        open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window.
        It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened
        or selected.  When a buffer has no name it also has no directory, thus
        the current directory won't change when navigating to it.
        Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'autochdir',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('change directory to the file in the current window'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_acd',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ac',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on, Vim shows a completion menu as you type, similar to using
        |i_CTRL-N|, but triggered automatically.  See |ins-autocompletion|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'autocomplete',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('automatic completion in insert mode'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ac',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'acl',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Delay in milliseconds before the autocomplete menu appears after
        typing.  If you prefer it not to open too quickly, set this value
        slightly above your typing speed.  See |ins-autocompletion|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'autocompletedelay',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('delay in msec before menu appears after typing'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_acl',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'act',
      defaults = 80,
      desc = [=[
        Initial timeout (in milliseconds) for the decaying time-sliced
        completion algorithm.  Starts at this value, halves for each slower
        source until a minimum is reached.  All sources run, but slower ones
        are quickly de-prioritized.  The default is tuned so the popup menu
        opens within ~200ms even with multiple slow sources on a slow system.
        Changing this value is rarely needed.  Only 80 or higher is valid.
        Special case: when 'complete' contains "F" or "o" (function sources),
        a longer timeout is used, allowing up to ~1s for sources such as LSP
        servers that may sometimes take longer (e.g., while loading modules).
        See |ins-autocompletion|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'autocompletetimeout',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('initial decay timeout for autocompletion algorithm'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_act',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ai',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
        in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command).  If you do not
        type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
        <Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again.  Moving the cursor
        to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included
        in 'cpoptions'.
        When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you
        reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first
        line.
        When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
        a different way.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'autoindent',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('take indent for new line from previous line'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ai',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ar',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
        it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
        When the file has been deleted this is not done, so you have the text
        from before it was deleted.  When it appears again then it is read.
        |timestamp|
        If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
        using the global value: >vim
        	set autoread<
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'autoread',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('autom. read file when changed outside of Vim'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ar',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'aw',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
        `:next`, `:rewind`, `:last`, `:first`, `:previous`, `:stop`,
        `:suspend`, `:tag`, `:!`, `:make`, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when
        a `:buffer`, CTRL-O, CTRL-I, '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one
        to another file.
        A buffer is not written if it becomes hidden, e.g. when 'bufhidden' is
        set to "hide" and `:next` is used.
        Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
        'autowriteall' for that.
        Some buffers will not be written, specifically when 'buftype' is
        "nowrite", "nofile", "terminal" or "prompt".
        USE WITH CARE: If you make temporary changes to a buffer that you
        don't want to be saved this option may cause it to be saved anyway.
        Renaming the buffer with ":file {name}" may help avoid this.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'autowrite',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('automatically write file if changed'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_aw',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'awa',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew",
        ":quit", ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim
        window.
        Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
        been set.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'autowriteall',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("as 'autowrite', but works with more commands"),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_awa',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bg',
      cb = 'did_set_background',
      defaults = 'dark',
      values = { 'light', 'dark' },
      desc = [=[
        When set to "dark" or "light", adjusts the default color groups for
        that background type.  The |TUI| or other UI sets this on startup
        (triggering |OptionSet|) if it can detect the background color.

        This option does NOT change the background color, it tells Nvim what
        the "inherited" (terminal/GUI) background looks like.
        See |:hi-normal| if you want to set the background color explicitly.
        					*g:colors_name*
        When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set)
        changing 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded.  If
        the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
        However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
        be undone.  First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed.

        Normally this option would be set in the vimrc file.  Possibly
        depending on the terminal name.  Example: >vim
        	if $TERM ==# "xterm"
        	  set background=dark
        	endif
        <	When this option is changed, the default settings for the highlight groups
        will change.  To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
        the setting of the 'background' option.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'background',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('"dark" or "light", used for highlight colors'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_bg',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bs',
      cb = 'did_set_backspace',
      defaults = 'indent,eol,start',
      values = { 'indent', 'eol', 'start', 'nostop' },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
        mode.  This is a list of items, separated by commas.  Each item allows
        a way to backspace over something:
        value	effect	~
        indent	allow backspacing over autoindent
        eol	allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
        start	allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
        	stop once at the start of insert.
        nostop	like start, except CTRL-W and CTRL-U do not stop at the start
        	of insert.

        When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used, none of
        the ways mentioned for the items above are possible.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'backspace',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('how backspace works at start of line'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_bs',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bk',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Make a backup before overwriting a file.  Leave it around after the
        file has been successfully written.  If you do not want to keep the
        backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
        written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
        the default).  If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
        options (use this if your file system is almost full).  See the
        |backup-table| for more explanations.
        When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
        When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
        oldest version of a file.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'backup',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('keep backup file after overwriting a file'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_bk',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bkc',
      cb = 'did_set_backupcopy',
      defaults = { condition = 'UNIX', if_false = 'auto', if_true = 'auto' },
      values = { 'yes', 'auto', 'no', 'breaksymlink', 'breakhardlink' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
        done.  This is a comma-separated list of words.

        The main values are:
        "yes"	make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
        "no"	rename the file and write a new one
        "auto"	one of the previous, what works best

        Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:
        "breaksymlink"	always break symlinks when writing
        "breakhardlink"	always break hardlinks when writing

        Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
        - Takes extra time to copy the file.
        + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
          has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
        - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
          not of the real file.

        Renaming the file and writing a new one:
        + It's fast.
        - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
          file.
        - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.

        The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming the
        file is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on
        and the file is not a link) that is used.  When problems are expected,
        a copy will be made.

        The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in
        combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto".  When included, they
        force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing
        exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to
        become the backup and writing a new file in its place.  This can be
        useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or
        hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not
        be propagated back to the original source.
        							*crontab*
        One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
        that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
        the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
        backup file instead of the newly created file.  "crontab -e" is an
        example, as are several |file-watcher| daemons like inotify.  In that
        case you probably want to switch this option.

        When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
        with the new text.  This means that protection bits, owner and
        symbolic links of the original file are unmodified.  The backup file,
        however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file.  The
        group of the backup is set to the group of the original file.  If this
        fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
        others.

        When the file is renamed, this is the other way around: The backup has
        the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
        is owned by the current user.  When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
        link, the new file will not!  That's why the "auto" value doesn't
        rename when the file is a link.  The owner and group of the newly
        written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
        the system may refuse to do this.  In that case the "auto" value will
        again not rename the file.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'backupcopy',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_("make backup as a copy, don't rename the file"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_bkc',
      flags_varname = 'bkc_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bdir',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
        - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
          where this is possible.  If none of the directories exist Nvim will
          attempt to create the last directory in the list.
        - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
          impossible!).  Writing may fail because of this.
        - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
          as the edited file.
        - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-Windows) means to put
          the backup file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading
          "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
          ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
        - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
          of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
          name, precede it with a backslash.
        - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
        - A directory name may end in an '/'.
        - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//",
          the swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
          with all path separators changed to percent '%' signs.  This will
          ensure file name uniqueness in the backup directory.
          On Win32, it is also possible to end with "\\".  However, When a
          separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will
          include the comma in the file name.  Therefore it is recommended to
          use '//', instead of '\\'.
        - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
          get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >vim
            set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
        <
        See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
        If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >vim
        	set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
        <	You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
        home directory for this to work properly.
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.
      ]=],
      expand = 'nodefault',
      full_name = 'backupdir',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('list of directories for the backup file'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_bdir',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bex',
      cb = 'did_set_backupext_or_patchmode',
      defaults = '~',
      desc = [=[
        String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
        backup file.  The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
        accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file.  You might
        prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
        ".bak" that you want to keep.
        Only normal file name characters can be used; `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.

        If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre
        autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to
        include a timestamp. >vim
        	au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' .. strftime("%Y%b%d%X") .. '~'
        <	Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'backupext',
      normal_fname_chars = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('extension used for the backup file'),
      tags = { 'E589' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_bex',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bsk',
      defaults = {
        if_true = '',
        doc = [["$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"
        Unix: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"
        Mac: "/private/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*"]],
        meta = '/tmp/*',
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A list of file patterns.  When one of the patterns matches with the
        name of the file which is written, no backup file is created.  Both
        the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
        The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-pattern|.
        Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
        When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
        default value.  "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.

        WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write
        your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
        lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only disable
        backups if you don't care about losing the file.

        Note that environment variables are not expanded.  If you want to use
        $HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: >vim
        	let &backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') .. '/tmp/*'

        <	Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a
        backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see
        the newly created file).  Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'backupskip',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('no backup for files that match these patterns'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_bsk',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bo',
      defaults = 'all',
      values = {
        'all',
        'backspace',
        'cursor',
        'complete',
        'copy',
        'ctrlg',
        'error',
        'esc',
        'ex',
        'hangul',
        'insertmode',
        'lang',
        'mess',
        'showmatch',
        'operator',
        'register',
        'shell',
        'spell',
        'term',
        'wildmode',
      },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Specifies for which events the bell will not be rung.  It is a comma-
        separated list of items.  For each item that is present, the bell will
        be silenced.  This is most useful to specify specific events in insert
        mode to be silenced.
        You can also make it flash by using 'visualbell'.

        item	    meaning when present	~
        all	    All events.
        backspace   When hitting <BS> or <Del> and deleting results in an
        	    error.
        cursor	    Fail to move around using the cursor keys or
        	    <PageUp>/<PageDown> in |Insert-mode|.
        complete    Error occurred when using |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K| or
        	    |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.
        copy	    Cannot copy char from insert mode using |i_CTRL-Y| or
        	    |i_CTRL-E|.
        ctrlg	    Unknown Char after <C-G> in Insert mode.
        error	    Other Error occurred (e.g. try to join last line)
        	    (mostly used in |Normal-mode| or |Cmdline-mode|).
        esc	    hitting <Esc> in |Normal-mode|.
        hangul	    Ignored.
        lang	    Calling the beep module for Lua/Mzscheme/TCL.
        mess	    No output available for |g<|.
        showmatch   Error occurred for 'showmatch' function.
        operator    Empty region error |cpo-E|.
        register    Unknown register after <C-R> in |Insert-mode|.
        shell	    Bell from shell output |:!|.
        spell	    Error happened on spell suggest.
        term	    Bell from |:terminal| output.
        wildmode    More matches in |cmdline-completion| available
        	    (depends on the 'wildmode' setting).

        This is most useful to fine tune when in Insert mode the bell should
        be rung.  For Normal mode and Ex commands, the bell is often rung to
        indicate that an error occurred.  It can be silenced by adding the
        "error" keyword.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'belloff',
      list = 'comma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('do not ring the bell for these reasons'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_bo',
      flags_varname = 'bo_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bin',
      cb = 'did_set_binary',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        This option should be set before editing a binary file.  You can also
        use the |-b| Vim argument.  When this option is switched on a few
        options will be changed (also when it already was on):
        	'textwidth'  will be set to 0
        	'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
        	'modeline'   will be off
        	'expandtab'  will be off
        Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
        file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
        separates lines).
        The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
        file is read without conversion.
        NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
        on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
        'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing.  You might want to set
        'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
        The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
        'bin' is switched from on to off.  Each buffer has its own set of
        saved option values.
        To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument.
        This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all
        files you edit.
        When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
        there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
        the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer).  See
        the 'endofline' option.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'binary',
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('read/write/edit file in binary mode'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_bin',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
        Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
        - this option is on
        - the 'binary' option is off
        - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
          endian variants.
        Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
        Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows.  For other applications it
        causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
        appear halfway through the resulting file.  Gcc doesn't accept a BOM.
        When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
        check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
        Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
        don't see it when editing.  When you don't change the options, the BOM
        will be restored when writing the file.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'bomb',
      no_mkrc = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('a Byte Order Mark to the file'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_bomb',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'brk',
      cb = 'did_set_breakat',
      defaults = {
        if_true = ' \t!@*-+;:,./?',
        doc = '" ^I!@*-+;:,./?"',
      },
      flags = true,
      desc = [=[
        This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
        break if 'linebreak' is on.  Only works for ASCII characters.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'breakat',
      list = 'flags',
      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('characters that may cause a line break'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_breakat',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bri',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Every wrapped line will continue visually indented (same amount of
        space as the beginning of that line), thus preserving horizontal
        blocks of text.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'breakindent',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('wrapped line repeats indent'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'briopt',
      cb = 'did_set_breakindentopt',
      defaults = '',
      -- Keep this in sync with briopt_check().
      values = { 'shift:', 'min:', 'sbr', 'list:', 'column:' },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Settings for 'breakindent'.  It can consist of the following optional
        items and must be separated by a comma:
        	min:{n}	    Minimum text width that will be kept after
        		    applying 'breakindent', even if the resulting
        		    text should normally be narrower.  This prevents
        		    text indented almost to the right window border
        		    occupying lots of vertical space when broken.
        		    (default: 20)
        	shift:{n}   After applying 'breakindent', the wrapped line's
        		    beginning will be shifted by the given number of
        		    characters.  It permits dynamic French paragraph
        		    indentation (negative) or emphasizing the line
        		    continuation (positive).
        		    (default: 0)
        	sbr	    Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the
        		    additional indent.
        		    (default: off)
        	list:{n}    Adds an additional indent for lines that match a
        		    numbered or bulleted list (using the
        		    'formatlistpat' setting).
        		    (default: 0)
        	list:-1	    Uses the width of a match with 'formatlistpat' for
        		    indentation.
        	column:{n}  Indent at column {n}.  Will overrule the other
        		    sub-options.  Note: an additional indent may be
        		    added for the 'showbreak' setting.
        		    (default: off)
      ]=],
      full_name = 'breakindentopt',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_("settings for 'breakindent'"),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bsdir',
      defaults = {
        if_true = '',
        doc = '"last"',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Which directory to use for the file browser:
           last		Use same directory as with last file browser, where a
        		file was opened or saved.
           buffer	Use the directory of the related buffer.
           current	Use the current directory.
           {path}	Use the specified directory
      ]=],
      full_name = 'browsedir',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('which directory to start browsing in'),
      type = 'string',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bh',
      cb = 'did_set_bufhidden',
      defaults = '',
      values = { '', 'hide', 'unload', 'delete', 'wipe' },
      desc = [=[
        This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
        displayed in a window:
          <empty>	follow the global 'hidden' option
          hide		hide the buffer (don't unload it), even if 'hidden' is
        		not set
          unload	unload the buffer, even if 'hidden' is set; the
        		|:hide| command will also unload the buffer
          delete	delete the buffer from the buffer list, even if
        		'hidden' is set; the |:hide| command will also delete
        		the buffer, making it behave like |:bdelete|
          wipe		wipe the buffer from the buffer list, even if
        		'hidden' is set; the |:hide| command will also wipe
        		out the buffer, making it behave like |:bwipeout|

        CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer
        are lost without a warning.  Also, these values may break autocommands
        that switch between buffers temporarily.
        This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
        special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'bufhidden',
      noglob = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('what to do when buffer is no longer in window'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_bh',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bl',
      cb = 'did_set_buflisted',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list.  If
        it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
        This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
        a file name or marks.  Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
        But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".
      ]=],
      full_name = 'buflisted',
      noglob = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('whether the buffer shows up in the buffer list'),
      tags = { 'E85' },
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_bl',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'bt',
      cb = 'did_set_buftype',
      defaults = '',
      values = {
        '',
        'acwrite',
        'help',
        'nofile',
        'nowrite',
        'quickfix',
        'terminal',
        'prompt',
      },
      desc = [=[
        The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
          <empty>	normal buffer
          acwrite	buffer will always be written with |BufWriteCmd|s
          help		help buffer (do not set this manually)
          nofile	buffer is not related to a file, will not be written
          nowrite	buffer will not be written
          prompt	buffer where only the last section can be edited, for
        		use by plugins. |prompt-buffer|
          quickfix	list of errors |:cwindow| or locations |:lwindow|
          terminal	|terminal-emulator| buffer

        This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
        specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
        Also see |win_gettype()|, which returns the type of the window.

        Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!
        One such effect is that Vim will not check the timestamp of the file,
        if the file is changed by another program this will not be noticed.

        A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location
        list.  This value is set by the |:cwindow| and |:lwindow| commands and
        you are not supposed to change it.

        "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
        both:		The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
        		work (":w filename" does work though).
        both:		The buffer is never considered to be 'modified'.
        		There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
        		example when you quit Vim.
        both:		A swap file is only created when using too much memory
        		(when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
        		file).
        nofile only:	The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
        		file name.  It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
        		command.
        both:		When using ":e bufname" and already editing "bufname"
        		the buffer is made empty and autocommands are
        		triggered as usual for |:edit|.
        						*E676*
        "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like
        "nofile", but it will be written.  Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and
        "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned
        without saving.  For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|,
        |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'buftype',
      noglob = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      tags = { 'E382' },
      short_desc = N_('special type of buffer'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_bt',
    },
    {
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Sets a buffer "busy" status. Indicated in the default statusline.
        When busy status is larger then 0 busy flag is shown in statusline.
        The semantics of "busy" are arbitrary, typically decided by the plugin that owns the buffer.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'busy',
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      noglob = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('buffer is busy'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_busy',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cmp',
      defaults = 'internal,keepascii',
      values = { 'internal', 'keepascii' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Specifies details about changing the case of letters.  It may contain
        these words, separated by a comma:
        internal	Use internal case mapping functions, the current
        		locale does not change the case mapping. When
        		"internal" is omitted, the towupper() and towlower()
        		system library functions are used when available.
        keepascii	For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
        		case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
        		This probably only matters for Turkish.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'casemap',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('specifies how case of letters is changed'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cmp',
      flags_varname = 'cmp_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cdh',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'MSWIN',
        if_false = true,
        if_true = false,
        doc = [[on on Unix, off on Windows]],
      },
      desc = [=[
        When on, |:cd|, |:tcd| and |:lcd| without an argument changes the
        current working directory to the |$HOME| directory like in Unix.
        When off, those commands just print the current directory name.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cdhome',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_(':cd without argument goes to the home directory'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_cdh',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cd',
      defaults = {
        if_true = ',,',
        doc = 'equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,"',
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
        |:cd|, |:tcd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being
        searched for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with
        "/", "./" or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then.
        The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
        'path'.  Also see |file-searching|.
        The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
        in the current directory first.
        If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
        a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
        override it: >vim
          let &cdpath = ',' .. substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
        <	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'cdpath',
      list = 'comma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('list of directories searched with ":cd"'),
      tags = { 'E344', 'E346' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cdpath',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_cedit',
      defaults = {
        if_true = macros('CTRL_F_STR', 'string'),
        doc = 'CTRL-F',
      },
      desc = [=[
        The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
        Only non-printable keys are allowed.
        The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
        type.  The preferred way is to use |key-notation| (e.g. <Up>, <C-F>) or
        a letter preceded with a caret (e.g. `^F` is CTRL-F).  Examples: >vim
        	set cedit=^Y
        	set cedit=<Esc>
        <	|Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
        See |cmdwin|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cedit',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('used to open the command-line window'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cedit',
    },
    {
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        |channel| connected to the buffer, or 0 if no channel is connected.
        In a |:terminal| buffer this is the terminal channel.
        Read-only.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'channel',
      no_mkrc = true,
      nodefault = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('Channel connected to the buffer'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_channel',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ccv',
      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        An expression that is used for character encoding conversion.  It is
        evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
        different encoding from what is desired.
        'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
        supported and is able to do the conversion.  Using iconv() is
        preferred, because it is much faster.
        'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
        file to convert from.  You will have to save the text in a file first.
        The expression must return zero, false or an empty string for success,
        non-zero or true for failure.
        See |encoding-names| for possible encoding names.
        Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
        used.
        Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
        is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
        Also used for Unicode conversion.
        Example: >vim
        	set charconvert=CharConvert()
        	fun CharConvert()
        	  system("recode "
        		\ .. v:charconvert_from .. ".." .. v:charconvert_to
        		\ .. " <" .. v:fname_in .. " >" .. v:fname_out)
        	  return v:shell_error
        	endfun
        <	The related Vim variables are:
        	v:charconvert_from	name of the current encoding
        	v:charconvert_to	name of the desired encoding
        	v:fname_in		name of the input file
        	v:fname_out		name of the output file
        Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.

        The advantage of using a function call without arguments is that it is
        faster, see |expr-option-function|.

        If the 'charconvert' expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is
        replaced with the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
        	set charconvert=s:MyConvert()
        	set charconvert=<SID>SomeConvert()
        <	Otherwise the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
        where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'charconvert',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('expression for character encoding conversion'),
      type = 'string',
      tags = { 'E202', 'E214', 'E513' },
      varname = 'p_ccv',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'chi',
      cb = 'did_set_xhistory',
      defaults = 10,
      desc = [=[
        Number of quickfix lists that should be remembered for the quickfix
        stack.  Must be between 1 and 100.  If the option is set to a value
        that is lower than the amount of entries in the quickfix list stack,
        entries will be removed starting from the oldest one.  If the current
        quickfix list was removed, then the quickfix list at top of the stack
        (the most recently created) will be used in its place.  For additional
        info, see |quickfix-stack|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'chistory',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('number of quickfix lists stored in history'),
      tags = { 'E1542', 'E1543' },
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_chi',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cin',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Enables automatic C program indenting.  See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
        that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
        preferred indent style.
        If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
        If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
        the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
        external program.
        See |C-indenting|.
        When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
        option or 'indentexpr'.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cindent',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('do C program indenting'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_cin',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cink',
      defaults = '0{,0},0),0],:,0#,!^F,o,O,e',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
        the current line.  Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
        empty.
        For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
        See |C-indenting|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cinkeys',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_("keys that trigger indent when 'cindent' is set"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cink',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cino',
      cb = 'did_set_cinoptions',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
        program.  See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
        |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cinoptions',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_("how to do indenting when 'cindent' is set"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cino',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cinsd',
      defaults = 'public,protected,private',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Keywords that are interpreted as a C++ scope declaration by |cino-g|.
        Useful e.g. for working with the Qt framework that defines additional
        scope declarations "signals", "public slots" and "private slots": >vim
        	set cinscopedecls+=signals,public\ slots,private\ slots
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cinscopedecls',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_("words that are recognized by 'cino-g'"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cinsd',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cinw',
      defaults = 'if,else,while,do,for,switch',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
        'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set.  For 'cindent' this is only done at
        an appropriate place (inside {}).
        Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'.  If case doesn't
        matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
        "if,If,IF".
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cinwords',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_("words where 'si' and 'cin' add an indent"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cinw',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cb',
      defaults = '',
      values = { 'unnamed', 'unnamedplus' },
      flags = true,
      desc = [=[
        This option is a list of comma-separated names.
        These names are recognized:

        					*clipboard-unnamed*
        unnamed		When included, Vim will use the clipboard register "*"
        		for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
        		would normally go to the unnamed register.  When a
        		register is explicitly specified, it will always be
        		used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
        		or not.  The clipboard register can always be
        		explicitly accessed using the "* notation.  Also see
        		|clipboard|.

        					*clipboard-unnamedplus*
        unnamedplus	A variant of the "unnamed" flag which uses the
        		clipboard register "+" (|quoteplus|) instead of
        		register "*" for all yank, delete, change and put
        		operations which would normally go to the unnamed
        		register.  When "unnamed" is also included to the
        		option, yank and delete operations (but not put)
        		will additionally copy the text into register
        		"*". See |clipboard|.
      ]=],
      deny_duplicates = true,
      full_name = 'clipboard',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('use the clipboard as the unnamed register'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cb',
      flags_varname = 'cb_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ch',
      cb = 'did_set_cmdheight',
      defaults = 1,
      desc = [=[
        Number of screen lines to use for the command-line.  Helps avoiding
        |hit-enter| prompts.
        The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab
        page can have a different value.

        When 'cmdheight' is zero, there is no command-line unless it is being
        used.  The command-line will cover the last line of the screen when
        shown.

        WARNING: `cmdheight=0` is EXPERIMENTAL. Works better with |ui2| enabled.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cmdheight',
      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('number of lines to use for the command-line'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_ch',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cwh',
      defaults = 7,
      desc = [=[
        Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cmdwinheight',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('height of the command-line window'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_cwh',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cc',
      cb = 'did_set_colorcolumn',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        'colorcolumn' is a comma-separated list of screen columns that are
        highlighted with ColorColumn |hl-ColorColumn|.  Useful to align
        text.  Will make screen redrawing slower.
        The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with
        '+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'. >vim

        	set cc=+1	  " highlight column after 'textwidth'
        	set cc=+1,+2,+3  " highlight three columns after 'textwidth'
        	hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey
        <
        When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used.
        A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'colorcolumn',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('columns to highlight'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'co',
      cb = 'did_set_lines_or_columns',
      defaults = {
        if_true = macros('DFLT_COLS', 'number'),
        doc = '80 or terminal width',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Number of columns of the screen.  Normally this is set by the terminal
        initialization and does not have to be set by hand.
        When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
        option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
        to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |ginit.vim| file.
        When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
        number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.  For
        the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to
        what fits on the screen.  You can use this command to get the widest
        window possible: >vim
        	set columns=9999
        <	Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'columns',
      no_mkrc = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('number of columns in the display'),
      tags = { 'E594' },
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_columns',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'com',
      cb = 'did_set_comments',
      defaults = 's1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-,fb:•',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A comma-separated list of strings that can start a comment line.  See
        |format-comments|.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
        insert a space.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'comments',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('patterns that can start a comment line'),
      tags = { 'E524', 'E525' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_com',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cms',
      cb = 'did_set_commentstring',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        A template for a comment.  The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
        comment text, and should be padded with a space when possible.
        Used for |commenting| and to add markers for folding, see |fold-marker|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'commentstring',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('template for comments; used for fold marker'),
      tags = { 'E537' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cms',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cp',
      defaults = false,
      full_name = 'compatible',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cpt',
      cb = 'did_set_complete',
      defaults = '.,w,b,u,t',
      values = { '.', 'w', 'b', 'u', 'k', 'kspell', 's', 'i', 'd', ']', 't', 'U', 'f', 'F', 'o' },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This option controls how completion |ins-completion| behaves when
        using CTRL-P, CTRL-N, or |ins-autocompletion|.  It is also used for
        whole-line completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|.  It indicates the type of
        completion and the places to scan.  It is a comma-separated list of
        flags:
        .	scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
        w	scan buffers from other windows
        b	scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
        u	scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
        U	scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
        k	scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
        kspell  use the currently active spell checking |spell|
        k{dict}	scan the file {dict}.  Several "k" flags can be given,
        	patterns are valid too.  For example: >vim
        		set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
        <	s	scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
        s{tsr}	scan the file {tsr}.  Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
        	are valid too.
        i	scan current and included files
        d	scan current and included files for defined name or macro
        	|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
        ]	tag completion
        t	same as "]"
        f	scan the buffer names (as opposed to buffer contents)
        F{func}	call the function {func}.  Multiple "F" flags may be
        	specified.  Refer to |complete-functions| for details on how
        	the function is invoked and what it should return.  The value
        	can be the name of a function or a |Funcref|.  For |Funcref|
        	values, spaces must be escaped with a backslash ('\'), and
        	commas with double backslashes ('\\') (see |option-backslash|).
        	Unlike other sources, functions can provide completions
        	starting from a non-keyword character before the cursor, and
        	their start position for replacing text may differ from other
        	sources.  If the Dict returned by the {func} includes
        	`{"refresh": "always"}`, the function will be invoked again
        	whenever the leading text changes.
        	If generating matches is potentially slow, call
        	|complete_check()| periodically to keep Vim responsive.  This
        	is especially important for |ins-autocompletion|.
        F	equivalent to using "F{func}", where the function is taken
        	from the 'completefunc' option.
        o	equivalent to using "F{func}", where the function is taken
        	from the 'omnifunc' option.

        Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
        not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
        (gzipped files for example).  Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
        whole-line completion.

        CTRL-N, CTRL-P, and |ins-autocompletion| can be used for any
        'iskeyword'-based completion (dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included
        patterns |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]|, and normal
        expansions).  With the "F" and "o" flags in 'complete', non-keywords
        can also be completed.

        An optional match limit can be specified for a completion source by
        appending a caret ("^") followed by a {count} to the source flag.
        For example: ".^9,w,u,t^5" limits matches from the current buffer to 9
        and from tags to 5.  Other sources remain unlimited.
        Note: The match limit takes effect only during forward completion
        (CTRL-N) and is ignored during backward completion (CTRL-P).

        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'complete',
      modelineexpr = true,
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('specify how Insert mode completion works'),
      tags = { 'E535' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cpt',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cfu',
      cb = 'did_set_completefunc',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion
        with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
        See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
        invoked and what it should return.  The value can be the name of a
        function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for
        more information.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'completefunc',
      func = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('function to be used for Insert mode completion'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cfu',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cia',
      cb = 'did_set_completeitemalign',
      defaults = 'abbr,kind,menu',
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A comma-separated list of strings that controls the alignment and
        display order of items in the popup menu during Insert mode
        completion.  The supported values are "abbr", "kind", and "menu".
        These values allow customizing how |complete-items| are shown in the
        popup menu.  Note: must always contain those three values in any
        order.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'completeitemalign',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Insert mode completion item align order'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cia',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cot',
      cb = 'did_set_completeopt',
      defaults = 'menu,popup',
      values = {
        'menu',
        'menuone',
        'longest',
        'preview',
        'popup',
        'noinsert',
        'noselect',
        'fuzzy',
        'nosort',
        'preinsert',
        'nearest',
      },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A comma-separated list of options for Insert mode completion
        |ins-completion|.  The supported values are:

           fuzzy    Enable |fuzzy-matching| for completion candidates.  This
        	    allows for more flexible and intuitive matching, where
        	    characters can be skipped and matches can be found even
        	    if the exact sequence is not typed (disabled for thesaurus
        	    completion |compl-thesaurus|).

           longest
        	    When 'autocomplete' is not active, only the longest common
        	    prefix of the matches is inserted (disabled for thesaurus
        	    completion |compl-thesaurus|).  If the popup menu is
        	    displayed, you can use CTRL-L to add more characters.
        	    Whether case is ignored depends on the type of completion.
        	    For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option applies.

        	    When 'autocomplete' is active and no completion item is
        	    selected, the longest common prefix of the matches is
        	    inserted after the cursor.  The prefix is taken either
        	    from all displayed items or only from items in the current
        	    buffer.  The inserted text is highlighted with
        	    |hl-PreInsert|, and the cursor position does not change
        	    (similar to `"preinsert"`).  Press CTRL-Y to accept.
        	    See also |preinserted()|.

           menu	    Use a popup menu to show the possible completions.  The
        	    menu is only shown when there is more than one match and
        	    sufficient colors are available.  |ins-completion-menu|

           menuone  Use the popup menu also when there is only one match.
        	    Useful when there is additional information about the
        	    match, e.g., what file it comes from.

           nearest  Matches are listed based on their proximity to the cursor
        	    position, unlike the default behavior, which only
        	    considers proximity for matches appearing below the
        	    cursor.  This applies only to matches from the current
        	    buffer.  No effect if "fuzzy" is present.

           noinsert Do not insert any text for a match until the user selects
        	    a match from the menu.  Only works in combination with
        	    "menu" or "menuone". No effect if "longest" is present.

           noselect Same as "noinsert", except that no menu item is
        	    pre-selected.  If both "noinsert" and "noselect" are
        	    present, "noselect" takes precedence.  This is enabled
        	    automatically when 'autocomplete' is on, unless
        	    "preinsert" is also enabled.

           nosort   Disable sorting of completion candidates based on fuzzy
        	    scores when "fuzzy" is enabled.  Candidates will appear
        	    in their original order.

           popup    Show extra information about the currently selected
        	    completion in a popup window.  Only works in combination
        	    with "menu" or "menuone".  Overrides "preview".

           preinsert
        	    Inserts the text of the first completion candidate beyond
        	    the current leader, highlighted with |hl-PreInsert|.
        	    The cursor does not move.
        	    Requires "fuzzy" to be unset, and either "menuone" in
        	    'completeopt' or 'autocomplete' enabled.  When
        	    'autocomplete' is enabled, this does not work if
        	    'ignorecase' is set without 'infercase'.
        	    See also |preinserted()|.

           preview  Show extra information about the currently selected
        	    completion in the preview window.  Only works in
        	    combination with "menu" or "menuone".

        Only "fuzzy", "longest", "popup", "preinsert" and "preview" have an
        effect when 'autocomplete' is enabled.

        This option does not apply to |cmdline-completion|.  See 'wildoptions'
        for that.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'completeopt',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('options for Insert mode completion'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cot',
      flags_varname = 'cot_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'csl',
      cb = 'did_set_completeslash',
      defaults = '',
      values = { '', 'slash', 'backslash' },
      desc = [=[
        		only modifiable in MS-Windows
        When this option is set it overrules 'shellslash' for completion:
        - When this option is set to "slash", a forward slash is used for path
          completion in insert mode.  This is useful when editing HTML tag, or
          Makefile with 'noshellslash' on MS-Windows.
        - When this option is set to "backslash", backslash is used.  This is
          useful when editing a batch file with 'shellslash' set on
          MS-Windows.
        - When this option is empty, same character is used as for
          'shellslash'.
        For Insert mode completion the buffer-local value is used.  For
        command line completion the global value is used.
      ]=],
      enable_if = 'BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
      full_name = 'completeslash',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_csl',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cto',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Like 'autocompletetimeout', but applies to |i_CTRL-N| and |i_CTRL-P|
        completion.  Value of 0 disables the timeout; positive values allowed.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'completetimeout',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('initial decay timeout for CTRL-N and CTRL-P'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_cto',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cocu',
      cb = 'did_set_concealcursor',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed.
        When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in
        other lines.
          n		Normal mode
          v		Visual mode
          i		Insert mode
          c		Command line editing, for 'incsearch'

        'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor.
        A useful value is "nc".  This is used in help files.  So long as you
        are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text
        or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that
        you can see what you are doing.
        Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's
        displayed.  E.g., when moving vertically it may change column.
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_concealcursor',
      full_name = 'concealcursor',
      list = 'flags',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('whether concealable text is hidden in cursor line'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cole',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute |:syn-conceal|
        is shown:

        Value		Effect ~
        0		Text is shown normally
        1		Each block of concealed text is replaced with one
        		character.  If the syntax item does not have a custom
        		replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|) the
        		character defined in 'listchars' is used.
        		It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group.
        2		Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a
        		custom replacement character defined (see
        		|:syn-cchar|).
        3		Concealed text is completely hidden.

        Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can
        edit and copy the text.  This can be changed with the 'concealcursor'
        option.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'conceallevel',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('whether concealable text is shown or hidden'),
      type = 'number',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cf',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
        fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
        instead raise a dialog asking if you wish to save the current
        file(s).  You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
        If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
        command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
        command.
        Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'confirm',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('ask what to do about unsaved/read-only files'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_confirm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ci',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
        new line.  Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
        tabs followed by spaces as required (unless 'expandtab' is enabled,
        in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option makes the
        new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
        existing line.  'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab
        remains a Tab.  If the new indent is greater than on the existing
        line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
        See 'preserveindent'.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'copyindent',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_("make 'autoindent' use existing indent structure"),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ci',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cpo',
      cb = 'did_set_cpoptions',
      defaults = macros('CPO_VIM', 'string'),
      desc = [=[
        A sequence of single character flags.  When a character is present
        this indicates Vi-compatible behavior.  This is used for things where
        not being Vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
        'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
        Commas can be added for readability.
        To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
        "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.

            contains	behavior	~
        							*cpo-a*
        	a	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
        		argument will set the alternate file name for the
        		current window.
        							*cpo-A*
        	A	When included, a ":write" command with a file name
        		argument will set the alternate file name for the
        		current window.
        							*cpo-b*
        	b	"\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
        		the map command.  The '\' is included in the mapping,
        		the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
        		command.  Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
        		include the '|' in the mapping.  Applies to all
        		mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
        		See also |map_bar|.
        							*cpo-B*
        	B	A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
        		abbreviations, user commands and the "to" part of the
        		menu commands.  Remove this flag to be able to use a
        		backslash like a CTRL-V.  For example, the command
        		":map X \\<Esc>" results in X being mapped to:
        			'B' included:	"\^["	 (^[ is a real <Esc>)
        			'B' excluded:	"<Esc>"  (5 characters)
        							*cpo-c*
        	c	Searching continues at the end of any match at the
        		cursor position, but not further than the start of the
        		next line.  When not present searching continues
        		one character from the cursor position.  With 'c'
        		"abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
        		"/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
        							*cpo-C*
        	C	Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
        		backslash.  See |line-continuation|.
        							*cpo-d*
        	d	Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
        		the tags file relative to the current file, but the
        		tags file in the current directory.
        							*cpo-D*
        	D	Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
        		commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
        		|t|.
        							*cpo-e*
        	e	When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
        		<CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
        		linewise.  If this flag is not present, the register
        		is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
        		<CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
        		and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
        							*cpo-E*
        	E	It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
        		"gU" on an Empty region.  The operators only work when
        		at least one character is to be operated on.  Example:
        		This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
        							*cpo-f*
        	f	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
        		argument will set the file name for the current
        		buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
        		yet.
        							*cpo-F*
        	F	When included, a ":write" command with a file name
        		argument will set the file name for the current
        		buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
        		yet.  Also see |cpo-P|.
        							*cpo-i*
        	i	When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
        		leave it modified.
        							*cpo-I*
        	I	When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting
        		indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent.
        							*cpo-J*
        	J	A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
        		the '.', '!' or '?'.  A <Tab> is not recognized as
        		white space.
        							*cpo-K*
        	K	Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
        		halfway through a mapping.  This breaks mapping
        		<F1><F1> when only part of the second <F1> has been
        		read.  It enables cancelling the mapping by typing
        		<F1><Esc>.
        							*cpo-l*
        	l	Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
        		literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special.
        		See |/[]|
        		   'l' included: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
        		   'l' excluded: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space> and <Tab>
        							*cpo-L*
        	L	When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
        		'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode
        		(see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of
        		the normal behavior of a <Tab>.
        							*cpo-m*
        	m	When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
        		second.  When not included, a showmatch will wait half
        		a second or until a character is typed.  'showmatch'
        							*cpo-M*
        	M	When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
        		account.  Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
        		parenthesis match.  When included "%" ignores
        		backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
        							*cpo-n*
        	n	When included, the column used for 'number' and
        		'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped
        		lines.
        							*cpo-o*
        	o	Line offset to search command is not remembered for
        		next search.
        							*cpo-O*
        	O	Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
        		when it didn't exist when editing it.  This is a
        		protection against a file unexpectedly created by
        		someone else.  Vi didn't complain about this.
        							*cpo-P*
        	P	When included, a ":write" command that appends to a
        		file will set the file name for the current buffer, if
        		the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and
        		the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|.
        							*cpo-q*
        	q	When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the
        		position where it would be when joining two lines.
        							*cpo-r*
        	r	Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
        		command, instead of the actually used search string.
        							*cpo-R*
        	R	Remove marks from filtered lines.  Without this flag
        		marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used.
        							*cpo-s*
        	s	Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
        		first time.  This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
        		And it is the default.  If not present the options are
        		set when the buffer is created.
        							*cpo-S*
        	S	Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
        		(except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
        		'syntax').  This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
        		The options are set to the values in the current
        		buffer.  When you change an option and go to another
        		buffer, the value is copied.  Effectively makes the
        		buffer options global to all buffers.

        		's'    'S'     copy buffer options
        		no     no      when buffer created
        		yes    no      when buffer first entered (default)
        		 X     yes     each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
        							*cpo-t*
        	t	Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
        		"n" command.  Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
        		the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
        		last used search pattern.
        							*cpo-u*
        	u	Undo is Vi compatible.  See |undo-two-ways|.
        							*cpo-v*
        	v	Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
        		Insert mode.  Without this flag the characters are
        		erased from the screen right away.  With this flag the
        		screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
        		characters.
        							*cpo-W*
        	W	Don't overwrite a readonly file.  When omitted, ":w!"
        		overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
        							*cpo-x*
        	x	<Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
        		The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
        		because <Esc> normally aborts a command.  |c_<Esc>|
        							*cpo-X*
        	X	When using a count with "R" the replaced text is
        		deleted only once.  Also when repeating "R" with "."
        		and a count.
        							*cpo-y*
        	y	A yank command can be redone with ".".  Think twice if
        		you really want to use this, it may break some
        		plugins, since most people expect "." to only repeat a
        		change.
        							*cpo-Z*
        	Z	When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set,
        		don't reset 'readonly'.
        							*cpo-!*
        	!	When redoing a filter command, use the last used
        		external command, whatever it was.  Otherwise the last
        		used -filter- command is used.
        							*cpo-$*
        	$	When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
        		line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
        		The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
        		new text.  The line is redisplayed if you type any
        		command that moves the cursor from the insertion
        		point.
        							*cpo-%*
        	%	Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
        		Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
        		Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
        		Parens inside single and double quotes are also
        		counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
        		disturb the matching.  For example, in a line like
        		"if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
        		match the last one.  When this flag is not included,
        		parens inside single and double quotes are treated
        		specially.  When matching a paren outside of quotes,
        		everything inside quotes is ignored.  When matching a
        		paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
        		there is one).  This works very well for C programs.
        		This flag is also used for other features, such as
        		C-indenting.
        							*cpo-+*
        	+	When included, a ":write file" command will reset the
        		'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer
        		itself may still be different from its file.
        							*cpo->*
        	>	When appending to a register, put a line break before
        		the appended text.
        							*cpo-;*
        	;	When using |,| or |;| to repeat the last |t| search
        		and the cursor is right in front of the searched
        		character, the cursor won't move.  When not included,
        		the cursor would skip over it and jump to the
        		following occurrence.
        							*cpo-~*
        	~	When included, don't resolve symbolic links when
        		changing directory with |:cd|, |:lcd|, or |:tcd|.
        		This preserves the symbolic link path in buffer names
        		and when displaying the current directory.  When
        		excluded (default), symbolic links are resolved to
        		their target paths.
        							*cpo-_*
        	_	When using |cw| on a word, do not include the
        		whitespace following the word in the motion.
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_cpoptions',
      full_name = 'cpoptions',
      list = 'flags',
      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('flags for Vi-compatible behavior'),
      tags = { 'cpo' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_cpo',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'crb',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When this option is set, as the cursor in the current
        window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have
        this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and
        column.  This option is useful for viewing the
        differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode,
        inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are
        taken into account.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cursorbind',
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('move cursor in window as it moves in other windows'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cuc',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn
        |hl-CursorColumn|.  Useful to align text.  Will make screen redrawing
        slower.
        If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use
        these autocommands: >vim
        	au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn
        	au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cursorcolumn',
      redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('highlight the screen column of the cursor'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'cul',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Highlight the text line of the cursor with CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
        Useful to easily spot the cursor.  Will make screen redrawing slower.
        When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it
        easier to see the selected text.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cursorline',
      redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('highlight the screen line of the cursor'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'culopt',
      cb = 'did_set_cursorlineopt',
      defaults = 'both',
      -- Keep this in sync with fill_culopt_flags().
      values = { 'line', 'screenline', 'number', 'both' },
      flags = {
        Line = 0x01,
        Screenline = 0x02,
        Number = 0x04,
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Comma-separated list of settings for how 'cursorline' is displayed.
        Valid values:
        "line"		Highlight the text line of the cursor with
        		CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
        "screenline"	Highlight only the screen line of the cursor with
        		CursorLine |hl-CursorLine|.
        "number"	Highlight the line number of the cursor with
        		CursorLineNr |hl-CursorLineNr|.

        Special value:
        "both"		Alias for the values "line,number".

        "line" and "screenline" cannot be used together.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'cursorlineopt',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_("settings for 'cursorline'"),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      defaults = '',
      values = { 'msg', 'throw', 'beep' },
      desc = [=[
        These values can be used:
        msg	Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given
        	anyway.
        throw	Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given
        	anyway and also throw an exception and set |v:errmsg|.
        beep	A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be
        	produced.
        The values can be combined, separated by a comma.
        "msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or
        'indentexpr'.
      ]=],
      -- TODO(lewis6991): bug, values currently cannot be combined
      full_name = 'debug',
      list = 'comma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('to "msg" to see all error messages'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_debug',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'def',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Pattern to be used to find a macro definition.  It is a search
        pattern, just like for the "/" command.  This option is used for the
        commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|.  The 'isident' option is
        used to recognize the defined name after the match: >
        	{match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
        <	See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
        or backslash.
        For C++ this value would be useful, to include const type declarations: >
        	^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
        <	You can also use "\ze" just before the name and continue the pattern
        to check what is following.  E.g. for Javascript, if a function is
        defined with `func_name = function(args)`: >
        	^\s*\ze\i\+\s*=\s*function(
        <	If the function is defined with `func_name : function() {...`: >
                ^\s*\ze\i\+\s*[:]\s*(*function\s*(
        <	When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!
        To avoid that use `:let` with a single quote string: >vim
        	let &l:define = '^\s*\ze\k\+\s*=\s*function('
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'define',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('pattern to be used to find a macro definition'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_def',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'deco',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
        "x" delete each combining character on its own.  When it is off (the
        default) the character along with its combining characters are
        deleted.
        Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work differently from "2x"!

        This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
        may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
        to remove only the combining ones.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'delcombine',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('delete combining characters on their own'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_deco',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'dict',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
        for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|.  Each file should
        contain a list of words.  This can be one word per line, or several
        words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
        preferred).  Maximum line length is 510 bytes.

        When this option is empty or an entry "spell" is present, and spell
        checking is enabled, words in the word lists for the currently active
        'spelllang' are used.  See |spell|.

        To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
        after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
        name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type.
        Where to find a list of words?
        - BSD/macOS include the "/usr/share/dict/words" file.
        - Try "apt install spell" to get the "/usr/share/dict/words" file on
          apt-managed systems (Debian/Ubuntu).
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.
        Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'dictionary',
      list = 'onecomma',
      normal_dname_chars = true,
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('list of file names used for keyword completion'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_dict',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_diff',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
        between files.  See |diff-mode|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'diff',
      noglob = true,
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('diff mode for the current window'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'dia',
      cb = 'did_set_diffanchors',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        List of {address} in each buffer, separated by commas, that are
        considered anchors when used for diffing.  It's valid to specify "$+1"
        for 1 past the last line.  "%" cannot be used for this option.  There
        can be at most 20 anchors set for each buffer.

        Each anchor line splits the buffer (the split happens above the
        anchor), with each part being diff'ed separately before the final
        result is joined.  When more than one {address} are provided, the
        anchors will be sorted internally by line number.  If using buffer
        local options, each buffer should have the same number of anchors
        (extra anchors will be ignored).  This option is only used when
        'diffopt' has "anchor" set.  See |diff-anchors| for more details and
        examples.
        							*E1550*
        If some of the {address} do not resolve to a line in each buffer (e.g.
        a pattern search that does not match anything), none of the anchors
        will be used.
        							*E1562*
        Diff anchors can only be used when there are no hidden diff buffers.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'diffanchors',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('list of addresses for anchoring a diff'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_dia',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'dex',
      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Expression which is evaluated to obtain a diff file (either ed-style
        or unified-style) from two versions of a file.  See |diff-diffexpr|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'diffexpr',
      redraw = { 'curswant' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('expression used to obtain a diff file'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_dex',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'dip',
      cb = 'did_set_diffopt',
      defaults = 'internal,filler,closeoff,indent-heuristic,inline:char,linematch:40',
      -- Keep this in sync with diffopt_changed().
      values = {
        'filler',
        'anchor',
        'context:',
        'iblank',
        'icase',
        'iwhite',
        'iwhiteall',
        'iwhiteeol',
        'horizontal',
        'vertical',
        'closeoff',
        'hiddenoff',
        'foldcolumn:',
        'followwrap',
        'internal',
        'indent-heuristic',
        { 'algorithm:', { 'myers', 'minimal', 'patience', 'histogram' } },
        { 'inline:', { 'none', 'simple', 'char', 'word' } },
        'linematch:',
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Option settings for diff mode.  It can consist of the following items.
        All are optional.  Items must be separated by a comma.

        	algorithm:{text} Use the specified diff algorithm with the
        			internal diff engine.  Currently supported
        			algorithms are:
        			myers      the default algorithm
        			minimal    spend extra time to generate the
        				   smallest possible diff
        			patience   patience diff algorithm
        			histogram  histogram diff algorithm

        	anchor		Anchor specific lines in each buffer to be
        			aligned with each other if 'diffanchors' is
        			set.  See |diff-anchors|.

        	closeoff	When a window is closed where 'diff' is set
        			and there is only one window remaining in the
        			same tab page with 'diff' set, execute
        			`:diffoff` in that window.  This undoes a
        			`:diffsplit` command.

        	context:{n}	Use a context of {n} lines between a change
        			and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
        			When omitted a context of six lines is used.
        			When using zero the context is actually one,
        			since folds require a line in between, also
        			for a deleted line.  Set it to a very large
        			value (999999) to disable folding completely.
        			See |fold-diff|.

        	filler		Show filler lines, to keep the text
        			synchronized with a window that has inserted
        			lines at the same position.  Mostly useful
        			when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
        			is set.

        	foldcolumn:{n}	Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when
        			starting diff mode.  Without this 2 is used.

        	followwrap	Follow the 'wrap' option and leave as it is.

        	horizontal	Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless
        			explicitly specified otherwise).

        	hiddenoff	Do not use diff mode for a buffer when it
        			becomes hidden.

        	iblank		Ignore changes where lines are all blank.
        			Adds the "-B" flag to the "diff" command if
        			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
        			of the "diff" command for what this does
        			exactly.
        			NOTE: the diff windows will get out of sync,
        			because no differences between blank lines are
        			taken into account.

        	icase		Ignore changes in case of text.  "a" and "A"
        			are considered the same.  Adds the "-i" flag
        			to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.

        	indent-heuristic
        			Use the indent heuristic for the internal
        			diff library.

        	inline:{text}	Highlight inline differences within a change.
        			See |view-diffs|.  Supported values are:

        			none    Do not perform inline highlighting.
        			simple  Highlight from first different
        				character to the last one in each
        				line.  This is the default if no
        				`inline:` value is set.
        			char    Use internal diff to perform a
        				character-wise diff and highlight the
        				difference.
        			word    Use internal diff to perform a
        				|word|-wise diff and highlight the
        				difference.  Non-alphanumeric
        				multi-byte characters such as emoji
        				and CJK characters are considered
        				individual words.  Small gaps of
        				non-word characters (5 bytes or less)
        				between changes are merged into a
        				single highlight block.

        	internal	Use the internal diff library.  This is
        			ignored when 'diffexpr' is set.  *E960*
        			When running out of memory when writing a
        			buffer or the diff is larger than 1 GB this
        			item will be ignored for diffs involving that
        			buffer.  Set the 'verbose' option to see when
        			this happens.

        	iwhite		Ignore changes in amount of white space.  Adds
        			the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
        			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
        			of the "diff" command for what this does
        			exactly.  It should ignore adding trailing
        			white space, but not leading white space.

        	iwhiteall	Ignore all white space changes.  Adds
        			the "-w" flag to the "diff" command if
        			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
        			of the "diff" command for what this does
        			exactly.

        	iwhiteeol	Ignore white space changes at end of line.
        			Adds the "-Z" flag to the "diff" command if
        			'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
        			of the "diff" command for what this does
        			exactly.

        	linematch:{n}   Align and mark changes between the most
        			similar lines between the buffers.  When the
        			total number of lines in the diff hunk exceeds
        			{n}, the lines will not be aligned because for
        			very large diff hunks there will be a
        			noticeable lag.  A reasonable setting is
        			"linematch:60", as this will enable alignment
        			for a 2 buffer diff hunk of 30 lines each, or
        			a 3 buffer diff hunk of 20 lines each.
        			Implicitly sets "filler" when this is set.

        	vertical	Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless
        			explicitly specified otherwise).

        Examples: >vim
        	set diffopt=internal,filler,context:4
        	set diffopt=
        	set diffopt=internal,filler,foldcolumn:3
        	set diffopt-=internal  " do NOT use the internal diff parser
        <
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_diffopt',
      full_name = 'diffopt',
      list = 'onecommacolon',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('options for using diff mode'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_dip',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'dg',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
        {char2}.  See |digraphs|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'digraph',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_dg',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'dir',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.

        Possible items:
        - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
          possible.  If it is not possible in any directory, but last
          directory listed in the option does not exist, it is created.
        - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
          impossible!) and no |E303| error will be given.
        - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
          the edited file.  On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
          it doesn't show in a directory listing.  On MS-Windows the "hidden"
          attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
        - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-Windows) means to put
          the swap file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading "."
          is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
        - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//",
          the swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
          with all path separators replaced by percent '%' signs (including
          the colon following the drive letter on Win32).  This will ensure
          file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
          On Win32, it is also possible to end with "\\".  However, When a
          separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will
          include the comma in the file name.  Therefore it is recommended to
          use '//', instead of '\\'.
        - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
          of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
          name, precede it with a backslash.
        - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
        - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
        - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
          get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >vim
            set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
        <
        Editing the same file twice will result in a warning.  Using "/tmp" on
        is discouraged: if the system crashes you lose the swap file. And
        others on the computer may be able to see the files.
        Use |:set+=| and |:set-=| when adding or removing directories from the
        list, this avoids problems if the Nvim default is changed.
      ]=],
      expand = 'nodefault',
      full_name = 'directory',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('list of directory names for the swap file'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_dir',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'dy',
      cb = 'did_set_display',
      defaults = 'lastline',
      values = { 'lastline', 'truncate', 'uhex', 'msgsep' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Change the way text is displayed.  This is a comma-separated list of
        flags:
        lastline	When included, as much as possible of the last line
        		in a window will be displayed.  "@@@" is put in the
        		last columns of the last screen line to indicate the
        		rest of the line is not displayed.
        truncate	Like "lastline", but "@@@" is displayed in the first
        		column of the last screen line.  Overrules "lastline".
        uhex		Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
        		instead of using ^C and ~C.
        msgsep		Obsolete flag. Allowed but takes no effect. |msgsep|

        When neither "lastline" nor "truncate" is included, a last line that
        doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.

        The "@" character can be changed by setting the "lastline" item in
        'fillchars'.  The character is highlighted with |hl-NonText|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'display',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('list of flags for how to display text'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_dy',
      flags_varname = 'dy_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ead',
      defaults = 'both',
      values = { 'both', 'ver', 'hor' },
      desc = [=[
        Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
        	ver	vertically, width of windows is not affected
        	hor	horizontally, height of windows is not affected
        	both	width and height of windows is affected
      ]=],
      full_name = 'eadirection',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("in which direction 'equalalways' works"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ead',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ed',
      defaults = false,
      full_name = 'edcompatible',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'emo',
      cb = 'did_set_emoji',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When on all Unicode emoji characters are considered to be full width.
        This excludes "text emoji" characters, which are normally displayed as
        single width. However, such "text emoji" are treated as full-width
        emoji if they are followed by the U+FE0F variant selector.

        Unfortunately there is no good specification for this and it has been
        determined on trial-and-error basis.  Use the |setcellwidths()|
        function to change the behavior.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'emoji',
      redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('No description'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_emoji',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'enc',
      cb = 'did_set_encoding',
      defaults = macros('ENC_DFLT', 'string'),
      desc = [=[
        String-encoding used internally and for |RPC| communication.
        Always UTF-8.

        See 'fileencoding' to control file-content encoding.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'encoding',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('encoding used internally'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_enc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'eof',
      cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Indicates that a CTRL-Z character was found at the end of the file
        when reading it.  Normally only happens when 'fileformat' is "dos".
        When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
        is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no CTRL-Z will be written at the
        end of the file.
        See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'endoffile',
      no_mkrc = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('write CTRL-Z for last line in file'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_eof',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'eol',
      cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
        is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no <EOL> will be written for the
        last line in the file.  This option is automatically set or reset when
        starting to edit a new file, depending on whether file has an <EOL>
        for the last line in the file.  Normally you don't have to set or
        reset this option.
        When 'binary' is off and 'fixeol' is on the value is not used when
        writing the file.  When 'binary' is on or 'fixeol' is off it is used
        to remember the presence of a <EOL> for the last line in the file, so
        that when you write the file the situation from the original file can
        be kept.  But you can change it if you want to.
        See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'endofline',
      no_mkrc = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('write <EOL> for last line in file'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_eol',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ea',
      cb = 'did_set_equalalways',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
        splitting or closing a window.  This also happens the moment the
        option is switched on.  When off, splitting a window will reduce the
        size of the current window and leave the other windows the same.  When
        closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it
        (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
        When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
        is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room.  The
        'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
        Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting
        'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively.
        If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are
        currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in
        the future).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'equalalways',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('windows are automatically made the same size'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ea',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ep',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        External program to use for "=" command.  When this option is empty
        the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent'
        or 'indentexpr'.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
        about including spaces and backslashes.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'equalprg',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('external program to use for "=" command'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ep',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'eb',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages.  This only
        makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
        for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
        mode).  See 'visualbell' to make the bell behave like a screen flash
        or do nothing.  See 'belloff' to finetune when to ring the bell.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'errorbells',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('ring the bell for error messages'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_eb',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ef',
      defaults = macros('DFLT_ERRORFILE', 'string'),
      desc = [=[
        Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
        When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
        following argument.  See |-q|.
        NOT used for the ":make" command.  See 'makeef' for that.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'errorfile',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ef',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'efm',
      defaults = {
        if_true = macros('DFLT_EFM', 'string'),
        doc = 'is very long',
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
        (see |errorformat|).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'errorformat',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('description of the lines in the error file'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_efm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ei',
      cb = 'did_set_eventignore',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
        When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand
        events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed.
        Otherwise this is a comma-separated list of event names.  Example: >vim
            set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
        <
        To ignore all but some events, a "-" prefix can be used: >vim
            :set ei=all,-WinLeave
        <
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_eventignore',
      full_name = 'eventignore',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('autocommand events that are ignored'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ei',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'eiw',
      cb = 'did_set_eventignore',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Similar to 'eventignore' but applies to a particular window and its
        buffers, for which window and buffer related autocommands can be
        ignored indefinitely without affecting the global 'eventignore'.

        Note: The following events are considered to happen outside of a
        window context and thus cannot be ignored by 'eventignorewin':

        	<PLACEHOLDER>
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_eventignore',
      full_name = 'eventignorewin',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('autocommand events that are ignored in a window'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'et',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
        <Tab>.  Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
        when 'autoindent' is on.  To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
        on, use CTRL-V<Tab>.  See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'expandtab',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('use spaces when <Tab> is inserted'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_et',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ex',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Enables project-local configuration. Nvim will execute any .nvim.lua,
        .nvimrc, or .exrc file found in the |current-directory| and all parent
        directories (ordered upwards), if the files are in the |trust| list.
        Use |:trust| to manage trusted files. See also |vim.secure.read()|.

        Unset 'exrc' to stop further searching of 'exrc' files in parent
        directories, similar to |editorconfig.root|.

        To get its own location, a Lua exrc file can use |debug.getinfo()|.
        See |lua-script-location|.

        Compare 'exrc' to |editorconfig|:
        - 'exrc' can execute any code; editorconfig only specifies settings.
        - 'exrc' is Nvim-specific; editorconfig works in other editors.

        To achieve project-local LSP configuration:
        1. Enable 'exrc'.
        2. Place LSP configs at ".nvim/lsp/*.lua" in your project root.
        3. Create ".nvim.lua" in your project root directory with this line: >lua
            vim.cmd[[set runtimepath+=.nvim]]
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'exrc',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('read project-local configuration in parent directories'),
      tags = { 'project-config', 'workspace-config' },
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_exrc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fenc',
      cb = 'did_set_encoding',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        File-content encoding for the current buffer. Conversion is done with
        iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.

        When 'fileencoding' is not UTF-8, conversion will be done when
        writing the file.  For reading see below.
        When 'fileencoding' is empty, the file will be saved with UTF-8
        encoding (no conversion when reading or writing a file).

        WARNING: Conversion to a non-Unicode encoding can cause loss of
        information!

        See |encoding-names| for the possible values.  Additionally, values may be
        specified that can be handled by the converter, see
        |mbyte-conversion|.

        When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
        To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
        'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.  One exception: when
        'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used.
        For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used.

        Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
        When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase.  Thus
        you can set it with uppercase values too.  '_' characters are
        replaced with '-'.  If a name is recognized from the list at
        |encoding-names|, it is replaced by the standard name.  For example
        "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".

        When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
        option is set, because the file would be different when written.

        Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens
        AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be
        written.  If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set
        'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q".

        This option cannot be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_encoding',
      full_name = 'fileencoding',
      no_mkrc = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines', 'current_buffer' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('file encoding for multi-byte text'),
      tags = { 'E213' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_fenc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fencs',
      defaults = 'ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
        an existing file.  When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first
        mentioned character encoding.  If an error is detected, the next one
        in the list is tried.  When an encoding is found that works,
        'fileencoding' is set to it.  If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to
        an empty string, which means that UTF-8 is used.
        	WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! You can use
        	the |++bad| argument to specify what is done with characters
        	that can't be converted.
        For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
        will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except
        "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present).  If you prefer
        another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your
        preferred encoding is to be used.  Example: >vim
        	au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
        		\ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
        <	This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
        non-blank characters.
        When the |++enc| argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is
        not used.
        Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value
        of 'fileencoding' is used instead.  You can set it with: >vim
        	setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2
        <	This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than
        an empty file.
        The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
        (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file.  It must not be preceded
        by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
        An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
        because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
        accepted.
        The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the
        environment.  It is useful when your environment uses a non-latin1
        encoding, such as Russian.
        When a file contains an illegal UTF-8 byte sequence it won't be
        recognized as "utf-8".  You can use the |8g8| command to find the
        illegal byte sequence.
        WRONG VALUES:			WHAT'S WRONG:
        	latin1,utf-8		"latin1" will always be used
        	utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1	BOM won't be recognized in a utf-8
        				file
        	cp1250,latin1		"cp1250" will always be used
        If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
        See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
        Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
        is read.
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_encoding',
      full_name = 'fileencodings',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('automatically detected character encodings'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_fencs',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ff',
      cb = 'did_set_fileformat',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'USE_CRNL',
        if_true = 'dos',
        if_false = 'unix',
        doc = 'Windows: "dos", Unix: "unix"',
      },
      values = { 'unix', 'dos', 'mac' },
      desc = [=[
        This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
        reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
            dos	    <CR><NL>
            unix    <NL>
            mac	    <CR>
        When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
        See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
        For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
        When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
        works like it was set to "unix".
        This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
        'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
        When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
        option is set, because the file would be different when written.
        This option cannot be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'fileformat',
      no_mkrc = true,
      redraw = { 'curswant', 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('file format used for file I/O'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ff',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ffs',
      cb = 'did_set_str_generic',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'USE_CRNL',
        if_true = 'dos,unix',
        if_false = 'unix,dos',
        doc = 'Windows: "dos,unix", Unix: "unix,dos"',
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when
        starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing
        buffer:
        - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
          always.  It is not set automatically.
        - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
          is opened.  'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer.  The
          'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
          buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
        - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
          <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file.  When starting to
          edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
          1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
             'fileformat' is set to "dos".
          2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix",
             'fileformat' is set to "unix".  Note that when a <NL> is found
             without a preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
          3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if a <CR> is found, and
             if 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
             This means that "mac" is only chosen when:
              "unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and
              "dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file.
             Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before
             the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in
             the first few lines, "mac" is used.
          4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
             'fileformats' is used.
          When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
          this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
          file only, the option is not changed.
        When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.

        When Vim starts up with an empty buffer the first item is used.  You
        can overrule this by setting 'fileformat' in your .vimrc.

        For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
        are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
        done:
        - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection.  Dos
          format will be used.
        - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
          is done.  This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
          <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
          used.
        Also see |file-formats|.
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_str_generic',
      full_name = 'fileformats',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("automatically detected values for 'fileformat'"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ffs',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fic',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME',
        if_false = false,
        if_true = true,
        doc = [[on for systems where case in file
   names is normally ignored]],
      },
      desc = [=[
        When set, case is ignored when using file and directory names.

        This option is on by default on systems where the filesystem is
        traditionally case-insensitive (for example MS-Windows and macOS).
        However, Vim cannot determine at runtime whether a particular
        filesystem is case-sensitive or case-insensitive.

        See 'wildignorecase' for only ignoring case when doing completion.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'fileignorecase',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('ignore case when using file names'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_fic',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ft',
      cb = 'did_set_filetype_or_syntax',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
        All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
        executed.  Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
        name.
        Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
        This option is normally set when the file type is detected.  To enable
        this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
        Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
        for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
        Example, for in an IDL file: >c
        	/* vim: set filetype=idl : */
        <	|FileType| |filetypes|
        When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
        names, it should therefore not be used for a filetype.  Example: >c
        	/* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */
        <	This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype.
        This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files.  More than
        one dot may appear.
        This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
        'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
        Only alphanumeric characters, '-' and '_' can be used (and a '.' is
        allowed as delimiter when combining different filetypes).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'filetype',
      noglob = true,
      normal_fname_chars = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('type of file, used for autocommands'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ft',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fcs',
      cb = 'did_set_chars_option',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Characters to fill the statuslines, vertical separators, special
        lines in the window and truncated text in the |ins-completion-menu|.
        It is a comma-separated list of items.  Each item has a name, a colon
        and the value of that item: |E1511|

          item		default		Used for ~
          stl		' '		statusline of the current window
          stlnc		' '		statusline of the non-current windows
          wbr		' '		window bar
          horiz		'─' or '-'	horizontal separators |:split|
          horizup	'┴' or '-'	upwards facing horizontal separator
          horizdown	'┬' or '-'	downwards facing horizontal separator
          vert		'│' or '|'	vertical separators |:vsplit|
          vertleft	'┤' or '|'	left facing vertical separator
          vertright	'├' or '|'	right facing vertical separator
          verthoriz	'┼' or '+'	overlapping vertical and horizontal
        				separator
          fold		'·' or '-'	filling 'foldtext'
          foldopen	'-'		mark the beginning of a fold
          foldclose	'+'		show a closed fold
          foldsep	'│' or '|'	open fold middle marker
          foldinner	none		character to show instead of the
        				numeric foldlevel when it would be
        				repeated in a narrow 'foldcolumn'
          diff		'-'		deleted lines of the 'diff' option
          msgsep	' '		message separator 'display'
          eob		'~'		empty lines at the end of a buffer
          lastline	'@'		'display' contains lastline/truncate
          trunc		'>'		truncated text in the
        				|ins-completion-menu|.
          truncrl	'<'		same as "trunc" in 'rightleft' mode

        Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default.

        Note that "horiz", "horizup", "horizdown", "vertleft", "vertright" and
        "verthoriz" are only used when 'laststatus' is 3, since only vertical
        window separators are used otherwise.

        If 'ambiwidth' is "double" then "horiz", "horizup", "horizdown",
        "vert", "vertleft", "vertright", "verthoriz", "foldsep" and "fold"
        default to single-byte alternatives.

        Example: >vim
            set fillchars=stl:\ ,stlnc:\ ,vert:│,fold:·,diff:-
        <
        All items support single-byte and multibyte characters.  But
        double-width characters are not supported. |E1512|

        The highlighting used for these items:
          item		highlight group ~
          stl		StatusLine		|hl-StatusLine|
          stlnc		StatusLineNC		|hl-StatusLineNC|
          wbr		WinBar			|hl-WinBar| or |hl-WinBarNC|
          horiz		WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
          horizup	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
          horizdown	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
          vert		WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
          vertleft	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
          vertright	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
          verthoriz	WinSeparator		|hl-WinSeparator|
          fold		Folded			|hl-Folded|
          foldopen	FoldColumn		|hl-FoldColumn|
          foldclose	FoldColumn		|hl-FoldColumn|
          foldsep	FoldColumn		|hl-FoldColumn|
          diff		DiffDelete		|hl-DiffDelete|
          msgsep	MsgSeparator		|hl-MsgSeparator|
          eob		EndOfBuffer		|hl-EndOfBuffer|
          lastline	NonText			|hl-NonText|
          trunc		one of the many Popup menu highlighting groups like
        		|hl-PmenuSel|
          truncrl	same as "trunc"
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_chars_option',
      full_name = 'fillchars',
      list = 'onecommacolon',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'global', 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('characters to use for displaying special items'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_fcs',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ffu',
      cb = 'did_set_findfunc',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Function that is called to obtain the filename(s) for the |:find|
        command.  When this option is empty, the internal |file-searching|
        mechanism is used.

        The value can be the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.
        See |option-value-function| for more information.

        The function is called with two arguments.  The first argument is a
        |String| and is the |:find| command argument.  The second argument is
        a |Boolean| and is set to |v:true| when the function is called to get
        a List of command-line completion matches for the |:find| command.
        The function should return a List of strings.

        The function is called only once per |:find| command invocation.
        The function can process all the directories specified in 'path'.

        If a match is found, the function should return a |List| containing
        one or more file names.  If a match is not found, the function
        should return an empty List.

        If any errors are encountered during the function invocation, an
        empty List is used as the return value.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        executing the 'findfunc' |textlock|.


        Examples:
        >vim
            " Use glob()
            func FindFuncGlob(cmdarg, cmdcomplete)
        	let pat = a:cmdcomplete ? $'{a:cmdarg}*' : a:cmdarg
        	return glob(pat, v:false, v:true)
            endfunc
            set findfunc=FindFuncGlob

            " Use the 'git ls-files' output
            func FindGitFiles(cmdarg, cmdcomplete)
        	let fnames = systemlist('git ls-files')
        	return fnames->filter('v:val =~? a:cmdarg')
            endfunc
            set findfunc=FindGitFiles
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'findfunc',
      func = true,
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('function called for :find'),
      tags = { 'E1514' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ffu',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fixeol',
      cb = 'did_set_eof_eol_fixeol_bomb',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When writing a file and this option is on, <EOL> at the end of file
        will be restored if missing.  Turn this option off if you want to
        preserve the situation from the original file.
        When the 'binary' option is set the value of this option doesn't
        matter.
        See the 'endofline' option.
        See |eol-and-eof| for example settings.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'fixendofline',
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('make sure last line in file has <EOL>'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_fixeol',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fcl',
      defaults = '',
      values = { 'all' },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
        its level is higher than 'foldlevel'.  Useful if you want folds to
        automatically close when moving out of them.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldclose',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('close a fold when the cursor leaves it'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_fcl',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fdc',
      defaults = '0',
      values = {
        'auto',
        'auto:1',
        'auto:2',
        'auto:3',
        'auto:4',
        'auto:5',
        'auto:6',
        'auto:7',
        'auto:8',
        'auto:9',
        '0',
        '1',
        '2',
        '3',
        '4',
        '5',
        '6',
        '7',
        '8',
        '9',
      },
      desc = [=[
        When and how to draw the foldcolumn. Valid values are:
            "auto":       resize to the minimum amount of folds to display.
            "auto:[1-9]": resize to accommodate multiple folds up to the
        		  selected level
            "0":          to disable foldcolumn
            "[1-9]":      to display a fixed number of columns
        See |folding|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldcolumn',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('width of the column used to indicate folds'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fen',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When off, all folds are open.  This option can be used to quickly
        switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
        folds (including manually opened or closed folds).  It can be toggled
        with the |zi| command.  The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
        'foldenable' is off.
        This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
        See |folding|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldenable',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('set to display all folds open'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fde',
      cb = 'did_set_foldexpr',
      defaults = '0',
      desc = [=[
        The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
        for each line to obtain its fold level.  The context is set to the
        script where 'foldexpr' was set, script-local items can be accessed.
        See |fold-expr| for the usage.

        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
        This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
        on or the 'modelineexpr' option is off.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldexpr',
      modelineexpr = true,
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('expression used when \'foldmethod\' is "expr"'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fdi',
      cb = 'did_set_foldignore',
      defaults = '#',
      desc = [=[
        Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent".  Lines starting with
        characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
        lines.  White space is skipped before checking for this character.
        The default "#" works well for C programs.  See |fold-indent|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldignore',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('ignore lines when \'foldmethod\' is "indent"'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fdl',
      cb = 'did_set_foldlevel',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
        Setting this option to zero will close all folds.  Higher numbers will
        close fewer folds.
        This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
        See |fold-foldlevel|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldlevel',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('close folds with a level higher than this'),
      type = 'number',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fdls',
      defaults = -1,
      desc = [=[
        Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
        Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
        some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
        This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
        overrules this option.  Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
        ignores this option and closes all folds.
        It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
        overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
        When the value is negative, it is not used.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldlevelstart',
      redraw = { 'curswant' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("'foldlevel' when starting to edit a file"),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_fdls',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fmr',
      cb = 'did_set_foldmarker',
      defaults = '{{{,}}}',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker".  There
        must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker.  The
        marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
        See |fold-marker|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldmarker',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('markers used when \'foldmethod\' is "marker"'),
      tags = { 'E536' },
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fdm',
      cb = 'did_set_foldmethod',
      defaults = 'manual',
      values = { 'manual', 'expr', 'marker', 'indent', 'syntax', 'diff' },
      desc = [=[
        The kind of folding used for the current window.  Possible values:
        |fold-manual|	manual	    Folds are created manually.
        |fold-indent|	indent	    Lines with equal indent form a fold.
        |fold-expr|	expr	    'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
        |fold-marker|	marker	    Markers are used to specify folds.
        |fold-syntax|	syntax	    Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
        |fold-diff|	diff	    Fold text that is not changed.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldmethod',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('folding type'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fml',
      cb = 'did_set_foldminlines',
      defaults = 1,
      desc = [=[
        Sets the number of screen lines above which a fold can be displayed
        closed.  Also for manually closed folds.  With the default value of
        one a fold can only be closed if it takes up two or more screen lines.
        Set to zero to be able to close folds of just one screen line.
        Note that this only has an effect on what is displayed.  After using
        "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
        than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldminlines',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines for a fold to be closed'),
      type = 'number',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fdn',
      cb = 'did_set_foldnestmax',
      defaults = 20,
      desc = [=[
        Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
        methods.  This avoids that too many folds will be created.  Using more
        than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldnestmax',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum fold depth'),
      type = 'number',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fdo',
      defaults = 'block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,search,tag,undo',
      values = {
        'all',
        'block',
        'hor',
        'mark',
        'percent',
        'quickfix',
        'search',
        'tag',
        'insert',
        'undo',
        'jump',
      },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
        command moves the cursor into a closed fold.  It is a comma-separated
        list of items.
        NOTE: When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used.
        Add the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
        (rationale: the mapping may want to control opening folds itself)

        	item		commands ~
        	all		any
        	block		(, {, [[, [{, etc.
        	hor		horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
        	insert		any command in Insert mode
        	jump		far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
        	mark		jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
        	percent		"%"
        	quickfix	":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
        	search		search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
        			(not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
        			Also for |[s| and |]s|.
        	tag		jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
        	undo		undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
        When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
        this option is not used.  This means the operator will include the
        whole closed fold.
        Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
        very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
        In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
        when text is inserted.
        To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
        set the 'foldclose' option to "all".
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldopen',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'curswant' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('for which commands a fold will be opened'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_fdo',
      flags_varname = 'fdo_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fdt',
      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
      defaults = 'foldtext()',
      desc = [=[
        An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
        fold.  The context is set to the script where 'foldexpr' was set,
        script-local items can be accessed.  See |fold-foldtext| for the
        usage.

        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|.

        When set to an empty string, foldtext is disabled, and the line
        is displayed normally with highlighting and no line wrapping.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'foldtext',
      modelineexpr = true,
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('expression used to display for a closed fold'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fex',
      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq|
        operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions').  When this
        option is empty 'formatprg' is used.

        The |v:lnum|  variable holds the first line to be formatted.
        The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted.
        The |v:char|  variable holds the character that is going to be
        	      inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to
        	      automatic formatting.  This can be empty.  Don't insert
        	      it yet!

        Example: >vim
        	set formatexpr=mylang#Format()
        <	This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the
        autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload|

        The advantage of using a function call without arguments is that it is
        faster, see |expr-option-function|.

        The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding
        text beyond that limit.  This happens under the same conditions as
        when internal formatting is used.  Make sure the cursor is kept in the
        same spot relative to the text then!  The |mode()| function will
        return "i" or "R" in this situation.

        When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
        the internal format mechanism.

        If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
        the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
        	set formatexpr=s:MyFormatExpr()
        	set formatexpr=<SID>SomeFormatExpr()
        <	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
        where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working,
        since changing the buffer text is not allowed.
        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'formatexpr',
      modelineexpr = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('expression used with "gq" command'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_fex',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'flp',
      defaults = '^\\s*\\d\\+[\\]:.)}\\t ]\\s*',
      desc = [=[
        A pattern that is used to recognize a list header.  This is used for
        the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'.
        The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for
        the line below it.  You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match
        while still checking more characters.  There must be a character
        following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled
        like there is no match.
        The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation
        character and white space.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'formatlistpat',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('pattern used to recognize a list header'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_flp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fo',
      cb = 'did_set_formatoptions',
      defaults = macros('DFLT_FO_VIM', 'string'),
      desc = [=[
        This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
        formatting is to be done.
        See |fo-table| for possible values and |gq| for how to format text.
        Commas can be inserted for readability.
        To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
        "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_formatoptions',
      full_name = 'formatoptions',
      list = 'flags',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('how automatic formatting is to be done'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_fo',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fp',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        External program used to format lines with |gq|. Ignored if
        'formatexpr' is set.

        If empty, the internal |C-indenting| function will be used.

        The program must take input on stdin and produce output on stdout. The
        Unix program "fmt" is such a program. Environment variables are
        expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash| about including spaces
        and backslashes.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'formatprg',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('name of external program used with "gq" command'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_fp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'fs',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When on, the OS function fsync() will be called after saving a file
        (|:write|, |writefile()|, …), |swap-file|, |undo-persistence| and |shada-file|.
        This flushes the file to disk, ensuring that it is safely written.
        Slow on some systems: writing buffers, quitting Nvim, and other
        operations may sometimes take a few seconds.

        Files are ALWAYS flushed ('fsync' is ignored) when:
        - |CursorHold| event is triggered
        - |:preserve| is called
        - system signals low battery life
        - Nvim exits abnormally

        This is a |global-local| option, so it can be set per buffer, for
        example when writing to a slow filesystem.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'fsync',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('whether to invoke fsync() after file write'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_fs',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'gd',
      defaults = false,
      full_name = 'gdefault',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_gd',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'gfm',
      defaults = macros('DFLT_GREPFORMAT', 'string'),
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
        This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
        'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.

        Defaults to "%f:%l:%c:%m" if ripgrep ('grepprg') is available.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'grepformat',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_("format of 'grepprg' output"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_gefm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'gp',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'MSWIN',
        if_false = 'grep -HIn $* /dev/null',
        if_true = 'findstr /n $* nul',
        doc = [[see below]],
      },
      desc = [=[
        Program to use for the |:grep| command.
        Note: if you change this then you must also update 'grepformat'.

        May contain "%" and "#" characters, are expanded per |cmdline-special|.
        The placeholder "$*" specifies where the arguments will be included.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
        about including spaces and backslashes.

        Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command
        works like |:vimgrep|, |:lgrep| like |:lvimgrep|, |:grepadd| like
        |:vimgrepadd| and |:lgrepadd| like |:lvimgrepadd|.

        See also |:make_makeprg|, most of the comments there apply to 'grepprg'.

        Defaults to:
        - "rg --vimgrep -uu " if ripgrep is available (|:checkhealth|),
        - "grep -HIn $* /dev/null" on Unix,
        - "findstr /n $* nul" on Windows.

        Ripgrep may perform additional filtering such as using .gitignore rules
        and skipping hidden files. This is disabled by default (via "-u") to
        more closely match the behaviour of standard grep.
        You can make ripgrep match Vim's case handling using the
        -i/--ignore-case and -S/--smart-case options. Handle |OptionSet| to
        dynamically update 'grepprg' when e.g. 'ignorecase' is changed.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'grepprg',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('program to use for ":grep"'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_gp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'gcr',
      cb = 'did_set_guicursor',
      defaults = 'n-v-c-sm:block,i-ci-ve:ver25,r-cr-o:hor20,t:block-blinkon500-blinkoff500-TermCursor',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Configures the cursor style for each mode. Works in the GUI and many
        terminals.  See |tui-cursor-shape|.

        To disable cursor-styling, reset the option: >vim
        	set guicursor=

        <	To enable mode shapes, "Cursor" highlight, and blinking: >vim
        	set guicursor=n-v-c:block,i-ci-ve:ver25,r-cr:hor20,o:hor50
        	  \,a:blinkwait700-blinkoff400-blinkon250-Cursor/lCursor
        	  \,sm:block-blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175

        <	The option is a comma-separated list of parts.  Each part consists of a
        mode-list and an argument-list:
        	mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
        The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
        	n	Normal mode
        	v	Visual mode
        	ve	Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
        		if not specified)
        	o	Operator-pending mode
        	i	Insert mode
        	r	Replace mode
        	c	Command-line Normal (append) mode
        	ci	Command-line Insert mode
        	cr	Command-line Replace mode
        	sm	showmatch in Insert mode
        	t	Terminal mode
        	a	all modes
        The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
        	hor{N}	horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
        	ver{N}	vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
        	block	block cursor, fills the whole character
        		- Only one of the above three should be present.
        		- Default is "block" for each mode.
        	blinkwait{N}				*cursor-blinking*
        	blinkon{N}
        	blinkoff{N}
        		blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
        		the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
        		the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
        		cursor is not shown.  Times are in msec.  When one of
        		the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. E.g.: >vim
        			set guicursor=n:blinkon0
        <
        		Default is "blinkon0" for each mode.
        	{group-name}
        		Highlight group that decides the color and font of the
        		cursor.
        		In the |TUI|:
        		- |inverse|/reverse and no group-name are interpreted
        		  as "host-terminal default cursor colors" which
        		  typically means "inverted bg and fg colors".
        		- |ctermfg| and |guifg| are ignored.
        	{group-name}/{group-name}
        		Two highlight group names, the first is used when
        		no language mappings are used, the other when they
        		are. |language-mapping|

        Examples of parts:
           n-c-v:block-nCursor	In Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
        			block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
        			highlight group
           n-v-c-sm:block,i-ci-ve:ver25-Cursor,r-cr-o:hor20
        			In Normal et al. modes, use a block cursor
        			with the default colors defined by the host
        			terminal.  In Insert-like modes, use
        			a vertical bar cursor with colors from
        			"Cursor" highlight group.  In Replace-like
        			modes, use an underline cursor with
        			default colors.
           i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
        			In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
        			30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
        			"iCursor" highlight group.  Blink a bit
        			faster.

        The 'a' mode is different.  It will set the given argument-list for
        all modes.  It does not reset anything to defaults.  This can be used
        to do a common setting for all modes.  For example, to switch off
        blinking: "a:blinkon0"

        Examples of cursor highlighting: >vim
            highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
            " Note: gui=reverse overrides colors.
            highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'guicursor',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('GUI: settings for cursor shape and blinking'),
      tags = { 'E545', 'E546', 'E548', 'E549' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_guicursor',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'gfn',
      defaults = {
        if_true = macros('DFLT_GFN', 'string'),
        doc = [["DejaVu Sans Mono,Courier New,monospace"
          Mac: "SF Mono,Menlo,Monaco,Courier New,monospace"
          Linux: "Source Code Pro,DejaVu Sans Mono,Courier New,monospace"
          MS-Windows: "Cascadia Code,Cascadia Mono,Consolas,Courier New,monospace"]],
        meta = 'DFLT_GFN',
      },
      desc = [=[
        This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
        In its simplest form the value is just one font name.  When
        the font cannot be found you will get an error message.  To try other
        font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
        The first valid font is used.

        Spaces after a comma are ignored.  To include a comma in a font name
        precede it with a backslash.  Setting an option requires an extra
        backslash before a space and a backslash.  See also
        |option-backslash|.  For example: >vim
            set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
        <	will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
        will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.

        If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.
        If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource
        settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
        will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
        the case of X).  The font names given should be "normal" fonts.  Vim
        will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.

        For Win32 and Mac OS: >vim
            set guifont=*
        <	will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.

        The font name depends on the GUI used.

        For Mac OSX you can use something like this: >vim
            set guifont=Monaco:h10
        <								*E236*
        Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
        width).

        To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
        program.  The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.

        For the Win32 GUI					*E244* *E245*
        - takes these options in the font name:
        	hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
        	wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
        	b   - bold
        	i   - italic
        	u   - underline
        	s   - strikeout
        	cXX - character set XX.  Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
        	      BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
        	      HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
        	      SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
        	      Normally you would use "cDEFAULT".

          Use a ':' to separate the options.
        - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
          backslashes to escape the spaces.
        - Examples: >vim
            set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
            set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
        <
      ]=],
      deny_duplicates = true,
      full_name = 'guifont',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('GUI: Name(s) of font(s) to be used'),
      tags = { 'E235', 'E596' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_guifont',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'gfw',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Comma-separated list of fonts to be used for double-width characters.
        The first font that can be loaded is used.
        Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
        specified with 'guifont' and the same height.

        When 'guifont' has a valid font and 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will
        attempt to set 'guifontwide' to a matching double-width font.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'guifontwide',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('list of font names for double-wide characters'),
      tags = { 'E231', 'E533', 'E534' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_guifontwide',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'go',
      defaults = {
        if_true = '',
        doc = '"egmrLT"   (MS-Windows)',
      },
      desc = [=[
        This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim.  It is a
        sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the
        GUI should be used.
        To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
        "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.

        Valid letters are as follows:
        						*guioptions_a* *'go-a'*
          'a'	Autoselect:  If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
        	or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
        	the windowing system's global selection.  This means that the
        	Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other
        	applications as well as into Vim itself.  When the Visual mode
        	ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an
        	application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text
        	is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.
        	Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other
        	applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.
        	    If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the
        	windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
        	by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
        	The same applies to the modeless selection.
        							*'go-P'*
          'P'	Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "*
        	register.
        							*'go-A'*
          'A'	Autoselect for the modeless selection.  Like 'a', but only
        	applies to the modeless selection.

        	    'guioptions'   autoselect Visual  autoselect modeless ~
        		 ""		 -			 -
        		 "a"		yes			yes
        		 "A"		 -			yes
        		 "aA"		yes			yes

        							*'go-c'*
          'c'	Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple
        	choices.
        							*'go-d'*
          'd'	Use dark theme variant if available.
        							*'go-e'*
          'e'	Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'.
        	'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels.
        	When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used.
        	The GUI tabs are only supported on some systems, currently
        	Mac OS/X and MS-Windows.
        							*'go-i'*
          'i'	Use a Vim icon.
        							*'go-m'*
          'm'	Menu bar is present.
        							*'go-M'*
          'M'	The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced.  Note
        	that this flag must be added in the vimrc file, before
        	switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc|
        	file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
        	`:syntax on` and `:filetype on` commands load the menu too).
        							*'go-g'*
          'g'	Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey.  If
        	'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
        							*'go-T'*
          'T'	Include Toolbar.  Currently only in Win32 GUI.
        							*'go-r'*
          'r'	Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
        							*'go-R'*
          'R'	Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
        	split window.
        							*'go-l'*
          'l'	Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
        							*'go-L'*
          'L'	Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
        	split window.
        							*'go-b'*
          'b'	Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present.  Its size depends on
        	the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'
        	flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll|
        							*'go-h'*
          'h'	Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor
        	line.  Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll|

        And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
        you really want to :-).  See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.

        							*'go-v'*
          'v'	Use a vertical button layout for dialogs.  When not included,
        	a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
        	vertical layout is used anyway.  Not supported in GTK 3.
        							*'go-p'*
          'p'	Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI.  This is required for some
        	window managers.  If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
        	the right moment, try adding this flag.  This must be done
        	before starting the GUI.  Set it in your |gvimrc|.  Adding or
        	removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
        							*'go-k'*
          'k'	Keep the GUI window size when adding/removing a scrollbar, or
        	toolbar, tabline, etc.  Instead, the behavior is similar to
        	when the window is maximized and will adjust 'lines' and
        	'columns' to fit to the window.  Without the 'k' flag Vim will
        	try to keep 'lines' and 'columns' the same when adding and
        	removing GUI components.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'guioptions',
      list = 'flags',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('GUI: Which components and options are used'),
      type = 'string',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'gtl',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When non-empty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab
        pages line.  When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a
        default label.  See |setting-guitablabel| for more info.

        The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.
        'guitabtooltip' is used for the tooltip, see below.
        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

        Only used when the GUI tab pages line is displayed.  'e' must be
        present in 'guioptions'.  For the non-GUI tab pages line 'tabline' is
        used.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'guitablabel',
      modelineexpr = true,
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('GUI: custom label for a tab page'),
      type = 'string',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'gtt',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When non-empty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab
        pages line.  When empty Vim will use a default tooltip.
        This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above.
        You can include a line break.  Simplest method is to use |:let|: >vim
        	let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two"
        <
        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'guitabtooltip',
      modelineexpr = true,
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('GUI: custom tooltip for a tab page'),
      type = 'string',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'hf',
      cb = 'did_set_helpfile',
      defaults = {
        if_true = macros('DFLT_HELPFILE', 'string'),
        doc = [[(MS-Windows) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
                  (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt"]],
      },
      desc = [=[
        Name of the main help file.  All distributed help files should be
        placed together in one directory.  Additionally, all "doc" directories
        in 'runtimepath' will be used.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  For example:
        "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt".  If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
        tried.  Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
        spaces and backslashes.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'helpfile',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('full path name of the main help file'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_hf',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'hh',
      cb = 'did_set_helpheight',
      defaults = 20,
      desc = [=[
        Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
        ":help" command.  The initial height of the help window is half of the
        current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
        windows.  When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
        set to 'helpheight'.  Set to zero to disable.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'helpheight',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('minimum height of a new help window'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_hh',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'hlg',
      cb = 'did_set_helplang',
      defaults = {
        if_true = '',
        doc = 'messages language or empty',
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Comma-separated list of languages.  Vim will use the first language
        for which the desired help can be found.  The English help will always
        be used as a last resort.  You can add "en" to prefer English over
        another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that
        language and not in the English help.
        Example: >vim
        	set helplang=de,it
        <	This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help
        files.
        When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will
        try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.
        See |help-translated|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'helplang',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('preferred help languages'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_hlg',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'hid',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When off a buffer is unloaded (including loss of undo information)
        when it is |abandon|ed.  When on a buffer becomes hidden when it is
        |abandon|ed.  A buffer displayed in another window does not become
        hidden, of course.

        Commands that move through the buffer list sometimes hide a buffer
        although the 'hidden' option is off when these three are true:
        - the buffer is modified
        - 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible
        - the '!' flag was used
        Also see |windows|.

        To hide a specific buffer use the 'bufhidden' option.
        'hidden' is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'hidden',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("don't unload buffer when it is |abandon|ed"),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_hid',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'hl',
      cb = 'did_set_highlight',
      defaults = macros('HIGHLIGHT_INIT', 'string'),
      deny_duplicates = true,
      full_name = 'highlight',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('sets highlighting mode for various occasions'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_hl',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'hi',
      defaults = 10000,
      desc = [=[
        A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
        is remembered.  This option decides how many entries may be stored in
        each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing| and 'messagesopt' for
        the number of messages to remember).
        The maximum value is 10000.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'history',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('number of command-lines that are remembered'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_hi',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'hk',
      defaults = false,
      full_name = 'hkmap',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'hkp',
      defaults = false,
      full_name = 'hkmapp',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'hls',
      cb = 'did_set_hlsearch',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
        The |hl-Search| highlight group determines the highlighting for all
        matches not under the cursor while the |hl-CurSearch| highlight group
        (if defined) determines the highlighting for the match under the
        cursor. If |hl-CurSearch| is not defined, then |hl-Search| is used for
        both. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
        are not applied.
        See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
        When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
        off with |:nohlsearch|.  This does not change the option value, as
        soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back.
        'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches.
        When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
        highlight all of the matched text.  However, this depends on where the
        search starts.  This will be the first line in the window or the first
        line below a closed fold.  A match in a previous line which is not
        drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line.
        You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup
        with the 'h' flag in 'shada' |shada-h|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'hlsearch',
      redraw = { 'all_windows', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('highlight matches with last search pattern'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_hls',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_title_icon',
      defaults = {
        if_true = false,
        doc = 'off, on when title can be restored',
      },
      desc = [=[
        When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
        'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
        currently being edited.  Only the last part of the name is used.
        Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
        Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'icon',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Vim set the text of the window icon'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_icon',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_iconstring',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
        the window.  This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
        Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
        When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
        expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.  See
        'titlestring' for example settings.
        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'iconstring',
      modelineexpr = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('to use for the Vim icon text'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_iconstring',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ic',
      cb = 'did_set_ignorecase',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Ignore case in search patterns, |cmdline-completion|, when
        searching in the tags file, |expr-==| and for Insert-mode completion
        |ins-completion|.
        Also see 'smartcase' and 'tagcase'.
        Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
        |/ignorecase|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'ignorecase',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('ignore case in search patterns'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ic',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'imc',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
        line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
        Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
        English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented
        characters with dead keys.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'imcmdline',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('use IM when starting to edit a command line'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'imd',
      defaults = {
        if_true = false,
        doc = 'off, on for some systems (SGI)',
      },
      desc = [=[
        When set the Input Method is never used.  This is useful to disable
        the IM when it doesn't work properly.
        Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines.  This
        may change in later releases.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'imdisable',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('do not use the IM in any mode'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'imi',
      cb = 'did_set_iminsert',
      defaults = macros('B_IMODE_NONE', 'number'),
      desc = [=[
        Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
        Insert mode.  Valid values:
        	0	:lmap is off and IM is off
        	1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
        	2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
        To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
        this can be used: >vim
        	inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
        <	This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
        mode.
        Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
        |i_CTRL-^|.
        The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
        It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".
      ]=],
      full_name = 'iminsert',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('use :lmap or IM in Insert mode'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_iminsert',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ims',
      defaults = macros('B_IMODE_USE_INSERT', 'number'),
      desc = [=[
        Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
        entering a search pattern.  Valid values:
        	-1	the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
        		'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
        	0	:lmap is off and IM is off
        	1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
        	2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
        Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode
        |c_CTRL-^|.
        The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
        option to a valid keymap name.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'imsearch',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('use :lmap or IM when typing a search pattern'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_imsearch',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'icm',
      cb = 'did_set_inccommand',
      defaults = 'nosplit',
      values = { 'nosplit', 'split', '' },
      desc = [=[
        When nonempty, shows the effects of |:substitute|, |:smagic|,
        |:snomagic| and user commands with the |:command-preview| flag as you
        type.

        Possible values:
        	nosplit	Shows the effects of a command incrementally in the
        		buffer.
        	split	Like "nosplit", but also shows partial off-screen
        		results in a preview window.

        If the preview for built-in commands is too slow (exceeds
        'redrawtime') then 'inccommand' is automatically disabled until
        |Command-line-mode| is done.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'inccommand',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Live preview of substitution'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_icm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'inc',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Pattern to be used to find an include command.  It is a search
        pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|).  This option
        is used for the commands "[i", "]I", "[d", etc.
        Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that
        comes after the matched pattern.  But if "\zs" appears in the pattern
        then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it
        appears, is used as the file name.  Use this to include characters
        that are not in 'isfname', such as a space.  You can then use
        'includeexpr' to process the matched text.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'include',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('pattern to be used to find an include file'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_inc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'inex',
      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
        option to a file name.  Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >vim
        	setlocal includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
        <	The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.
        Note the double backslash: the `:set` command first halves them, then
        one remains in the value, where "\." matches a dot literally.  For
        simple character replacements `tr()` avoids the need for escaping: >vim
        	setlocal includeexpr=tr(v:fname,'.','/')
        <
        Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
        found.  Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
        Note: Not used for |<cfile>|.

        If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
        the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
        	setlocal includeexpr=s:MyIncludeExpr()
        	setlocal includeexpr=<SID>SomeIncludeExpr()
        <	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
        where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

        It is more efficient if the value is just a function call without
        arguments, see |expr-option-function|.

        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'includeexpr',
      modelineexpr = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('expression used to process an include line'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_inex',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'is',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed
        so far, matches.  The matched string is highlighted.  If the pattern
        is invalid or not found, nothing is shown.  The screen will be updated
        often, this is only useful on fast terminals.
        Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its
        original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>.  You
        still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the
        cursor to the match.
        You can use the CTRL-G and CTRL-T keys to move to the next and
        previous match. |c_CTRL-G| |c_CTRL-T|
        Vim only searches for about half a second.  With a complicated
        pattern and/or a lot of text the match may not be found.  This is to
        avoid that Vim hangs while you are typing the pattern.
        The |hl-IncSearch| highlight group determines the highlighting.
        When 'hlsearch' is on, all matched strings are highlighted too while
        typing a search command.  See also: 'hlsearch'.
        If you don't want to turn 'hlsearch' on, but want to highlight all
        matches while searching, you can turn on and off 'hlsearch' with
        autocmd.  Example: >vim
        	augroup vimrc-incsearch-highlight
        	  autocmd!
        	  autocmd CmdlineEnter [\/\?] :set hlsearch
        	  autocmd CmdlineLeave [\/\?] :set nohlsearch
        	augroup END
        <
        CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match
        to the command line.  If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the
        command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is
        converted to lowercase.
        CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current
        match, excluding the characters that were already typed.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'incsearch',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('highlight match while typing search pattern'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_is',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'inde',
      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
        It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
        in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
        When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
        'smartindent' indenting.  When 'lisp' is set, this option is
        only used when 'lispoptions' contains "expr:1".
        The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
        which the indent is to be computed.  The cursor is also in this line
        when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).

        If the expression starts with s: or |<SID>|, then it is replaced with
        the script ID (|local-function|).  Example: >vim
        	set indentexpr=s:MyIndentExpr()
        	set indentexpr=<SID>SomeIndentExpr()
        <	Otherwise, the expression is evaluated in the context of the script
        where the option was set, thus script-local items are available.

        The advantage of using a function call without arguments is that it is
        faster, see |expr-option-function|.

        The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent.  It
        can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
        used for the indent).
        Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
        and |lispindent()|.
        The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects!  It must
        not change the text, jump to another window, etc.  Afterwards the
        cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
        Normally this option would be set to call a function: >vim
        	set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
        <	Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
        "msg".
        See |indent-expression|.

        The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
        modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'indentexpr',
      modelineexpr = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('expression used to obtain the indent of a line'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_inde',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'indk',
      defaults = '0{,0},0),0],:,0#,!^F,o,O,e',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
        the current line.  Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
        The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
        See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'indentkeys',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_("keys that trigger indenting with 'indentexpr'"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_indk',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'inf',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
        'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending
        on the typed text.  If the typed text contains a lowercase letter
        where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made
        lowercase.  If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match
        has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter,
        and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase.
        With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'infercase',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('adjust case of match for keyword completion'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_inf',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'im',
      defaults = false,
      full_name = 'insertmode',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'isf',
      cb = 'did_set_isopt',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
        if_false = '@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=',
        if_true = '@,48-57,/,\\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],@-@,!,~,=',
        doc = [[for Windows:
      "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],@-@,!,~,="
     otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="]],
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
        path names.  Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
        the tags file.  It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
        Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
        characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
        For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
        Think twice before adding white space to this option.  Although a
        space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim
        doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion.
        It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'.

        Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
        do its best to make it work as you would expect.  That is a bit
        tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
        characters.  Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
        name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes.  The
        '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
        cmd.exe.

        The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
        Each part can be a single character number or a range.  A range is two
        character numbers with '-' in between.  A character number can be a
        decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
        not work for digits).  Example:
        	"_,-,128-140,#-43"	(include '_' and '-' and the range
        				128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
        If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
        will be excluded from the option.  The option is interpreted from left
        to right.  Put the excluded character after the range where it is
        included.  To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
        option or the end of a range.  Example:
        	"^a-z,#,^"	(exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
        If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
        are included.  Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
        plus accented characters.  To include '@' itself use "@-@".  Examples:
        	"@,^a-z"	All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
        			case ASCII letters.
        	"a-z,A-Z,@-@"	All letters plus the '@' character.
        A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
        expected.  Example:
        	"48-57,,,_"	Digits, comma and underscore.
        A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'.  Example:
        	" -~,^,,9"	All characters from space to '~', excluding
        			comma, plus <Tab>.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'isfname',
      list = 'comma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('characters included in file names and pathnames'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_isf',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'isi',
      cb = 'did_set_isopt',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'MSWIN',
        if_false = '@,48-57,_,192-255',
        if_true = '@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235',
        doc = [[for Windows:
                    "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
         otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255"]],
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
        Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
        match of the 'define' option.  It is also used for "\i" in a
        |pattern|.  See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
        option.  For '@' only characters up to 255 are used.
        Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
        environment variables.  E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
        expand "$HOME/.local/state/nvim/shada/main.shada".  Maybe you should
        change 'iskeyword' instead.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'isident',
      list = 'comma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('characters included in identifiers'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_isi',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'isk',
      cb = 'did_set_iskeyword',
      defaults = '@,48-57,_,192-255',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
        "w", "*", "[i", etc.  It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|.  See
        'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.  For '@'
        characters above 255 check the "word" character class (any character
        that is categorized as a letter, number or emoji according to the
        Unicode general category).

        Note that there is a difference between the "\k" character class and
        the |word| motion.  The former matches any word character, while the
        latter stops at a change of the character class.

        For C programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
        For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
        "*", '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
        command).
        When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
        This option also influences syntax highlighting, unless the syntax
        uses |:syn-iskeyword|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'iskeyword',
      list = 'comma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('characters included in keywords'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_isk',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'isp',
      cb = 'did_set_isopt',
      defaults = '@,161-255',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
        screen.  It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|.  The characters from
        space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,
        even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded.  See
        'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.

        Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
        	  0 -  31	"^@" - "^_"
        	 32 - 126	always single characters
        	   127		"^?"
        	128 - 159	"~@" - "~_"
        	160 - 254	"| " - "|~"
        	   255		"~?"
        Illegal bytes from 128 to 255 (invalid UTF-8) are
        displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
        When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
        displayed as <xx>.
        The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
        |hl-SpecialKey|

        Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
        characters up to 255 are specified with this option.  When a character
        is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
        replacement character will be shown.
        Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
        There is no option to specify these characters.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'isprint',
      list = 'comma',
      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('printable characters'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_isp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'js',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
        Otherwise only one space is inserted.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'joinspaces',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('two spaces after a period with a join command'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_js',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'jop',
      defaults = 'clean',
      values = { 'stack', 'view', 'clean' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        List of words that change the behavior of the |jumplist|.
          stack         Make the jumplist behave like the tagstack.
        		Relative location of entries in the jumplist is
        		preserved at the cost of discarding subsequent entries
        		when navigating backwards in the jumplist and then
        		jumping to a location.  |jumplist-stack|

          view          When moving through the jumplist, |changelist|,
        		|alternate-file|, using |mark-motions| or when popping
        		the |tagstack| try to restore the |mark-view| in which
        		the action occurred.

          clean         Remove unloaded buffers from the jumplist.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'jumpoptions',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Controls the behavior of the jumplist'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_jop',
      flags_varname = 'jop_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'kmp',
      cb = 'did_set_keymap',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Name of a keyboard mapping.  See |mbyte-keymap|.
        Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
        setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
        'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
        Only alphanumeric characters, '.', '-' and '_' can be used.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'keymap',
      normal_fname_chars = true,
      pri_mkrc = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines', 'current_buffer' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('name of a keyboard mapping'),
      tags = { 'E544' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_keymap',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'km',
      cb = 'did_set_keymodel',
      defaults = '',
      values = { 'startsel', 'stopsel' },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        List of comma-separated words, which enable special things that keys
        can do.  These values can be used:
           startsel	Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
        		Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
        		present in 'selectmode').
           stopsel	Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
        Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
        <PageUp> and <PageDown>.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'keymodel',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('enable starting/stopping selection with keys'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_km',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'kp',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'MSWIN',
        if_true = ':help!',
        if_false = ':Man',
        doc = '":Man", Windows: ":help"',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Program to use for the |K| command.  Environment variables are
        expanded |:set_env|.

        Special cases:
        - ":help" opens the |word| at cursor using |:help|.  (Note that
          previously setting the global option to the empty value did this,
          which is now deprecated.)
        - ":help!" performs |:help!| (DWIM) on the |WORD| at cursor.
        - If the value starts with ":", it is invoked as an Ex command
          and [count] is passed as the first argument, if present.
        - If "man" or "man -s", [count] is the manpage section number.

        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.

        Example: >vim
        	set keywordprg=:help!
        	set keywordprg=man\ -s
        	set keywordprg=:Man
        <
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'keywordprg',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('program to use for the "K" command'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_kp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lmap',
      cb = 'did_set_langmap',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
        mode.  When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
        inserted directly.  When in Normal mode the 'langmap' option takes
        care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
        of the key.  This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
        be able to execute Normal mode commands.
        This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
        mapped in Insert mode.
        Also consider setting 'langremap' to off, to prevent 'langmap' from
        applying to characters resulting from a mapping.

        Example (for Greek, in UTF-8):				*greek*  >vim
            set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz
        <	Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >vim
            set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
        <
        The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas.  Each
        part can be in one of two forms:
        1.  A list of pairs.  Each pair is a "from" character immediately
            followed by the "to" character.  Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
        2.  A list of "from" characters, a semicolon and a list of "to"
            characters.  Example: "abc;ABC"
        Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
        Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash.  These are
        ";", ',', '"', '|' and backslash itself.

        This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
        back and forth between the languages.  Your language characters will
        be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
        langmap mappings) in the following cases:
         o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
         o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
         o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
        Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
        this option.   Note that this option can be changed at any time
        allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
        Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!
      ]=],
      full_name = 'langmap',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('alphabetic characters for other language mode'),
      tags = { 'E357', 'E358' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_langmap',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lm',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Language to use for menu translation.  Tells which file is loaded
        from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >vim
        	"lang/menu_" .. &langmenu .. ".vim"
        <	(without the spaces).  For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
        matter what $LANG is set to: >vim
        	set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
        <	When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
        Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
        If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
        the English menus: >vim
        	set langmenu=none
        <	This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
        detection or syntax highlighting.  Once the menus are defined setting
        this option has no effect.  But you could do this: >vim
        	source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
        	set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
        	source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
        <	Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
      ]=],
      full_name = 'langmenu',
      normal_fname_chars = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('language to be used for the menus'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_lm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lnr',
      cb = 'did_set_langnoremap',
      defaults = true,
      full_name = 'langnoremap',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("do not apply 'langmap' to mapped characters"),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_lnr',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lrm',
      cb = 'did_set_langremap',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When off, setting 'langmap' does not apply to characters resulting
        from a mapping.  If setting 'langmap' disables some of your mappings,
        make sure this option is off.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'langremap',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_lrm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ls',
      cb = 'did_set_laststatus',
      defaults = 2,
      desc = [=[
        The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
        status line:
        	0: never
        	1: only if there are at least two windows
        	2: always
        	3: always and ONLY the last window
        The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
        windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|
      ]=],
      full_name = 'laststatus',
      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('tells when last window has status lines'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_ls',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lz',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
        executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
        typed.  Also, updating the window title is postponed.  To force an
        update use |:redraw|.
        This may occasionally cause display errors.  It is only meant to be
        set temporarily when performing an operation where redrawing may cause
        flickering or cause a slowdown.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'lazyredraw',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("don't redraw while executing macros"),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_lz',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lhi',
      cb = 'did_set_xhistory',
      defaults = 10,
      desc = [=[
        Like 'chistory', but for the location list stack associated with a
        window.  If the option is changed in either the location list window
        itself or the window that is associated with the location list stack,
        the new value will also be applied to the other one.  This means this
        value will always be the same for a given location list window and its
        corresponding window.  See |quickfix-stack| for additional info.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'lhistory',
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('number of location lists stored in history'),
      type = 'number',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lbr',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        If on, Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
        than at the last character that fits on the screen.  Unlike
        'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
        it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents.
        If 'breakindent' is set, line is visually indented.  Then, the value
        of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines.  This option
        is not used when the 'wrap' option is off.
        Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
        with the right amount of white space.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'linebreak',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('wrap long lines at a blank'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_lines_or_columns',
      defaults = {
        if_true = macros('DFLT_ROWS', 'number'),
        doc = '24 or terminal height',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Number of lines of the Vim window.
        Normally you don't need to set this.  It is done automatically by the
        terminal initialization code.
        When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
        option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
        to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
        Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen.  You can
        use this command to get the tallest window possible: >vim
        	set lines=999
        <	Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'lines',
      no_mkrc = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('of lines in the display'),
      tags = { 'E593' },
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_lines',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lsp',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        		only in the GUI
        Number of pixel lines inserted between characters.  Useful if the font
        uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
        When non-zero there is room for underlining.
        With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have
        space for ascents and descents).  Then it makes sense to set
        'linespace' to a negative value.  This may cause display problems
        though!
      ]=],
      full_name = 'linespace',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('number of pixel lines to use between characters'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_linespace',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_lisp',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
        the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of).  Also happens with
        "cc" or "S".  'autoindent' must also be on for this to work.
        Also see 'lispwords'.
        The '-' character is included in keyword characters.  Redefines the
        "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
        calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'lisp',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('indenting for Lisp'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_lisp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lop',
      cb = 'did_set_lispoptions',
      defaults = '',
      values = { 'expr:0', 'expr:1' },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Comma-separated list of items that influence the Lisp indenting when
        enabled with the 'lisp' option.  Currently only one item is supported:
        	expr:1	use 'indentexpr' for Lisp indenting when it is set
        	expr:0	do not use 'indentexpr' for Lisp indenting (default)
        Note that when using 'indentexpr' the `=` operator indents all the
        lines, otherwise the first line is not indented (Vi-compatible).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'lispoptions',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('options for lisp indenting'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_lop',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lw',
      defaults = {
        if_true = macros('LISPWORD_VALUE', 'string'),
        doc = 'is very long',
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Comma-separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting when
        enabled with the 'lisp' option.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'lispwords',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('words that change how lisp indenting works'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_lispwords',
    },
    {
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        List mode: By default, show tabs as ">", trailing spaces as "-", and
        non-breakable space characters as "+". Useful to see the difference
        between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks. Further changed by
        the 'listchars' option.

        When 'listchars' does not contain "tab" field, tabs are shown as "^I"
        or "<09>", like how unprintable characters are displayed.

        The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character
        occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode.  To get this cursor
        position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: >vim
        	let &list = v:true | let &lcs = 'tab:  '
        <
        Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth'
        or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'.  See 'listchars' for
        changing the way tabs are displayed.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'list',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('<Tab> and <EOL>'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lcs',
      cb = 'did_set_chars_option',
      defaults = 'tab:> ,trail:-,nbsp:+',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command.  It is a
        comma-separated list of string settings. *E1511*

        						*lcs-eol*
          eol:c		Character to show at the end of each line.  When
        		omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
        		line.
        						*lcs-tab*
          tab:xy[z]	Two or three characters to be used to show a tab.
        		The third character is optional.

          tab:xy	The 'x' is always used, then 'y' as many times as will
        		fit.  Thus "tab:>-" displays: >
        			>
        			>-
        			>--
        			etc.
        <
          tab:xyz	The 'z' is always used, then 'x' is prepended, and
        		then 'y' is used as many times as will fit.  Thus
        		"tab:<->" displays: >
        			>
        			<>
        			<->
        			<-->
        			etc.
        <
        		When "tab:" is omitted, a tab is shown as ^I.
        						*lcs-space*
          space:c	Character to show for a space.  When omitted, spaces
        		are left blank.
        						*lcs-multispace*
          multispace:c...
        		One or more characters to use cyclically to show for
        		multiple consecutive spaces.  Overrides the "space"
        		setting, except for single spaces.  When omitted, the
        		"space" setting is used.  For example,
        		`:set listchars=multispace:---+` shows ten consecutive
        		spaces as: >
        			---+---+--
        <
        						*lcs-lead*
          lead:c	Character to show for leading spaces.  When omitted,
        		leading spaces are blank.  Overrides the "space" and
        		"multispace" settings for leading spaces.  You can
        		combine it with "tab:", for example: >vim
        			set listchars+=tab:>-,lead:.
        <
        						*lcs-leadmultispace*
          leadmultispace:c...
        		Like the |lcs-multispace| value, but for leading
        		spaces only.  Also overrides |lcs-lead| for leading
        		multiple spaces.
        		`:set listchars=leadmultispace:---+` shows ten
        		consecutive leading spaces as: >
        			---+---+--XXX
        <
        		Where "XXX" denotes the first non-blank characters in
        		the line.
        						*lcs-leadtab*
          leadtab:xy[z]
        		Like |lcs-tab|, but only for leading tabs.  When
        		omitted, the "tab" setting is used for leading tabs.
        		|lcs-tab| must also be set for this to work. *E1572*
        		You can combine it with "tab:", for example: >vim
        			let &listchars = 'tab:>-,leadtab:. '
        <			This shows leading tabs as periods(.) and other tabs
        		as ">--".
        						*lcs-trail*
          trail:c	Character to show for trailing spaces.  When omitted,
        		trailing spaces are blank.  Overrides the "space" and
        		"multispace" settings for trailing spaces.
        						*lcs-extends*
          extends:c	Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
        		off and the line continues beyond the right of the
        		screen.
        						*lcs-precedes*
          precedes:c	Character to show in the first visible column of the
        		physical line, when there is text preceding the
        		character visible in the first column.
        						*lcs-conceal*
          conceal:c	Character to show in place of concealed text, when
        		'conceallevel' is set to 1.  A space when omitted.
        						*lcs-nbsp*
          nbsp:c	Character to show for a non-breakable space character
        		(0xA0 (160 decimal) and U+202F).  Left blank when
        		omitted.

        The characters ':' and ',' should not be used.  UTF-8 characters can
        be used.  All characters must be single width. *E1512*

        Each character can be specified as hex: >vim
        	set listchars=eol:\\x24
        	set listchars=eol:\\u21b5
        	set listchars=eol:\\U000021b5
        <	Note that a double backslash is used.  The number of hex characters
        must be exactly 2 for \\x, 4 for \\u and 8 for \\U.

        Examples: >vim
            set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
            set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%
            set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
        <	|hl-NonText| highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
        "precedes". |hl-Whitespace| for "nbsp", "space", "tab", "multispace",
        "lead" and "trail".
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_chars_option',
      full_name = 'listchars',
      list = 'onecommacolon',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'global', 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('characters for displaying in list mode'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_lcs',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'lpl',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
        This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
        of plugins.
        Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
        reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
      ]=],
      full_name = 'loadplugins',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('load plugin scripts when starting up'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_lpl',
    },
    {
      defaults = true,
      full_name = 'magic',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_magic',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mef',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
        and the |:grep| command.
        When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
        When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
        unique.  This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
        existing file.
        NOT used for the ":cf" command.  See 'errorfile' for that.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'makeef',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('name of the errorfile for ":make"'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_mef',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'menc',
      cb = 'did_set_encoding',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Encoding used for reading the output of external commands.  When
        empty, encoding is not converted.
        This is used for `:make`, `:lmake`, `:grep`, `:lgrep`, `:grepadd`,
        `:lgrepadd`, `:cfile`, `:cgetfile`, `:caddfile`, `:lfile`, `:lgetfile`,
        and `:laddfile`.

        This would be mostly useful when you use MS-Windows.  If iconv is
        enabled, setting 'makeencoding' to "char" has the same effect as
        setting to the system locale encoding.  Example: >vim
        	set makeencoding=char	" system locale is used
        <
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_encoding',
      full_name = 'makeencoding',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('Converts the output of external commands'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_menc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mp',
      defaults = 'make',
      desc = [=[
        Program to use for the ":make" command.  See |:make_makeprg|.
        This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see  |:_%| and |:_#|),
        which are expanded to the current and alternate file name.  Use |::S|
        to escape file names in case they contain special characters.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
        about including spaces and backslashes.
        Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for
        the interpretation of a command.  When you use a filter called
        "myfilter" do it like this: >vim
            set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
        <	The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
        where the arguments will be included, for example: >vim
            set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
        <
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'makeprg',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('program to use for the ":make" command'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_mp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mps',
      cb = 'did_set_matchpairs',
      defaults = '(:),{:},[:]',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Characters that form pairs.  The |%| command jumps from one to the
        other.
        Only character pairs are allowed that are different, thus you cannot
        jump between two double quotes.
        The characters must be separated by a colon.
        The pairs must be separated by a comma.  Example for including '<' and
        '>' (for HTML): >vim
        	set mps+=<:>

        <	A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
        assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >vim
        	au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;

        <	For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
        the $VIMRUNTIME/plugin directory. |add-local-help|
      ]=],
      full_name = 'matchpairs',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('pairs of characters that "%" can match'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_mps',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mat',
      defaults = 5,
      desc = [=[
        Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
        set.  Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
        set a time.  This is to be compatible with Nvi.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'matchtime',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('tenths of a second to show matching paren'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_mat',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mco',
      defaults = macros('MAX_MCO', 'number'),
      full_name = 'maxcombine',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum nr of combining characters displayed'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_mco',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mfd',
      defaults = 100,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum depth of function calls for user functions.  This normally
        catches endless recursion.  When using a recursive function with
        more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number.  But this will use
        more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
        Increasing this limit above 200 also changes the maximum for Ex
        command recursion, see |E169|.
        See also |:function|.
        Also used for maximum depth of callback functions.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'maxfuncdepth',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum recursive depth for user functions'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_mfd',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mmd',
      defaults = 1000,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
        character to be used.  This normally catches endless mappings, like
        ":map x y" with ":map y x".  It still does not catch ":map g wg",
        because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done.  See also
        |key-mapping|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'maxmapdepth',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum recursive depth for mapping'),
      tags = { 'E223' },
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_mmd',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mmp',
      defaults = 1000,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching.
        The maximum value is about 2000000.  Use this to work without a limit.
        						*E363*
        When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly
        behaves like CTRL-C was typed.
        Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very
        inefficient or too complex.  This may already happen with the pattern
        `\(.\)*` on a very long line.  `.*` works much better.
        Might also happen on redraw, when syntax rules try to match a complex
        text structure.
        Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit, in
        which case you get an "Out of memory" error instead.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'maxmempattern',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum memory (in Kbyte) used for pattern search'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_mmp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'msc',
      defaults = 999,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum number of matches shown for the search count status |shm-S|
        When the number of matches exceeds this value, Vim shows ">" instead
        of the exact count to keep searching fast.
        Note: larger values may impact performance.
        The value must be between 1 and 9999.  See also the |searchcount()|
        function.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'maxsearchcount',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum number for the search count feature'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_msc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mis',
      defaults = 25,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum number of items to use in a menu.  Used for menus that are
        generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu.  Changing this
        option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'menuitems',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum number of items in a menu'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_mis',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mopt',
      cb = 'did_set_messagesopt',
      defaults = 'hit-enter,history:500,progress:c',
      values = { 'hit-enter', 'wait:', 'history:', 'progress:' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Option settings for outputting messages.  It can consist of the
        following items.  Items must be separated by a comma.

        history:{n}	Determines how many entries are remembered in the
        		|:messages| history.  The maximum value is 10000.
        		Setting it to zero clears the message history.
        		This item must always be present.

        hit-enter	Use a |hit-enter| prompt when the message is longer than
        		'cmdheight' size.

        progress:{s}	Determines where to show progress messages.
        		Valid values are:
        		  - empty: Progress messages not shown in cmdline.
        		  - "c": Progress messages are shown in cmdline.

        wait:{n}	Deprecated with |ui2|.
        		Instead of a |hit-enter| prompt, simply wait for {n}
        		milliseconds so the user has a chance to read the
        		message.  Maximum {n} is 10000.  Use 0 to disable the
        		wait (user won't see any "hit-enter" messages).
        		Ignored when "hit-enter" is present, but required when
        		"hit-enter" is not present.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'messagesopt',
      list = 'onecommacolon',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('options for outputting messages'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_mopt',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'msm',
      cb = 'did_set_mkspellmem',
      defaults = '460000,2000,500',
      desc = [=[
        Parameters for |:mkspell|.  This tunes when to start compressing the
        word tree.  Compression can be slow when there are many words, but
        it's needed to avoid running out of memory.  The amount of memory used
        per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why
        this tuning is complicated.

        There are three numbers, separated by commas: >
        	{start},{inc},{added}
        <
        For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory.  {start}
        gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any
        compression is done.  It should be a bit smaller than the amount of
        memory that is available to Vim.

        When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the
        amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another
        compression is done.  A low number means compression is done after
        less words are added, which is slow.  A high number means more memory
        will be allocated.

        After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before
        the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra
        amount of memory is needed.  A low number means there is a smaller
        chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's
        slower.

        The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and
        Hungarian.  The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte.  If
        you have 1 Gbyte you could use: >vim
        	set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800
        <	If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some
        languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'mkspellmem',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('memory used before |:mkspell| compresses the tree'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_msm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ml',
      defaults = {
        if_true = true,
        doc = 'on (off for root)',
      },
      desc = [=[
        If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
        checked for set commands.  If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
        no lines are checked.  See |modeline|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'modeline',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('recognize modelines at start or end of file'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ml',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mle',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on allow some options that are an expression to be set in the
        modeline.  Check the option for whether it is affected by
        'modelineexpr'.  Also see |modeline|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'modelineexpr',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('allow some options to be set in modeline'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_mle',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mls',
      defaults = 5,
      desc = [=[
        If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
        checked for set commands.  If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
        no lines are checked.  See |modeline|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'modelines',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('number of lines checked for modelines'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_mls',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ma',
      cb = 'did_set_modifiable',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When off the buffer contents cannot be changed.  The 'fileformat' and
        'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
        Can be reset on startup with the |-M| command line argument.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'modifiable',
      noglob = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('changes to the text are not possible'),
      tags = { 'E21' },
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ma',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mod',
      cb = 'did_set_modified',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on, the buffer is considered to be modified.  This option is set
        when:
        1. A change was made to the text since it was last written.  Using the
           |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
           option.  But undoing changes that were made before writing the
           buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
           when it was written.
        2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
           value.  The original value is set when the buffer is read or
           written.  A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
           values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
           reset.
           Similarly for 'eol' and 'bomb'.
        This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the
        result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost,
        FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event.  See |gzip-example| for
        an explanation.

        When 'buftype' is "prompt", 'modified' is not implicitly set when the
        buffer is changed, but a user or plugin may explicitly set it.

        When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile", this option may be set, but
        will be ignored.

        Note that the text may actually be the same, e.g. 'modified' is set
        when using "rA" on an "A".
      ]=],
      full_name = 'modified',
      no_mkrc = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('buffer has been modified'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_mod',
    },
    {
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled.  You will get
        the |more-prompt|.  When this option is off there are no pauses, the
        listing continues until finished.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'more',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('listings when the whole screen is filled'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_more',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_mouse',
      defaults = 'nvi',
      desc = [=[
        Enables mouse support. For example, to enable the mouse in Normal mode
        and Visual mode: >vim
        	set mouse=nv
        <
        To temporarily disable mouse support, hold the shift key while using
        the mouse.

        Mouse support can be enabled for different modes:
        	n	Normal mode
        	v	Visual mode
        	i	Insert mode
        	c	Command-line mode
        	h	all previous modes when editing a help file
        	a	all previous modes
        	r	for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt

        Left-click anywhere in a text buffer to place the cursor there.  This
        works with operators too, e.g. type |d| then left-click to delete text
        from the current cursor position to the position where you clicked.

        Drag the |status-line| or vertical separator of a window to resize it.

        If enabled for "v" (Visual mode) then double-click selects word-wise,
        triple-click makes it line-wise, and quadruple-click makes it
        rectangular block-wise.

        For scrolling with a mouse wheel see |scroll-mouse-wheel|.

        Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
        "* register if possible. See also 'clipboard'.

        Related options:
        'mousefocus'	window focus follows mouse pointer
        'mousemodel'	what mouse button does which action
        'mousehide'	hide mouse pointer while typing text
        'selectmode'	whether to start Select mode or Visual mode
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_mouse',
      full_name = 'mouse',
      list = 'flags',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('the use of mouse clicks'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_mouse',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mousef',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
        When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
        mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus.  Off is the
        default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
        a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'mousefocus',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('keyboard focus follows the mouse'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_mousef',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mh',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        		only in the GUI
        When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
        The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'mousehide',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('hide mouse pointer while typing'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_mh',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mousem',
      defaults = 'popup_setpos',
      values = { 'extend', 'popup', 'popup_setpos' },
      desc = [=[
        Sets the model to use for the mouse.  The name mostly specifies what
        the right mouse button is used for:
           extend	Right mouse button extends a selection.  This works
        		like in an xterm.
           popup	Right mouse button pops up a menu.  The shifted left
        		mouse button extends a selection.  This works like
        		with Microsoft Windows.
           popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
        		position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
        		selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
        		If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
        		be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move.  This implies of
        		course, that right clicking outside a selection will
        		end Visual mode.
        Overview of what button does what for each model:
        mouse		    extend		popup(_setpos) ~
        left click	    place cursor	place cursor
        left drag	    start selection	start selection
        shift-left	    search word		extend selection
        right click	    extend selection	popup menu (place cursor)
        right drag	    extend selection	-
        middle click	    paste		paste

        In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
        Nvim creates a default |popup-menu| but you can redefine it.

        Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
        See |mouse-overview|.  But mappings are NOT used for modeless selection.

        Example: >vim
            map <S-LeftMouse>     <RightMouse>
            map <S-LeftDrag>      <RightDrag>
            map <S-LeftRelease>   <RightRelease>
            map <2-S-LeftMouse>   <2-RightMouse>
            map <2-S-LeftDrag>    <2-RightDrag>
            map <2-S-LeftRelease> <2-RightRelease>
            map <3-S-LeftMouse>   <3-RightMouse>
            map <3-S-LeftDrag>    <3-RightDrag>
            map <3-S-LeftRelease> <3-RightRelease>
            map <4-S-LeftMouse>   <4-RightMouse>
            map <4-S-LeftDrag>    <4-RightDrag>
            map <4-S-LeftRelease> <4-RightRelease>
        <
        Mouse commands requiring the CTRL modifier can be simulated by typing
        the "g" key before using the mouse:
            "g<LeftMouse>"  is "<C-LeftMouse>	(jump to tag under mouse click)
            "g<RightMouse>" is "<C-RightMouse>	("CTRL-T")
      ]=],
      full_name = 'mousemodel',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('changes meaning of mouse buttons'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_mousem',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mousemev',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on, mouse move events are delivered to the input queue and are
        available for mapping |<MouseMove>|.  The default, off, avoids the
        mouse movement overhead except when needed.
        Warning: Setting this option can make pending mappings to be aborted
        when the mouse is moved.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'mousemoveevent',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('deliver mouse move events to input queue'),
      tags = { 'mouse-hover' },
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_mousemev',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_mousescroll',
      defaults = 'ver:3,hor:6',
      values = { 'hor:', 'ver:' },
      desc = [=[
        This option controls the number of lines / columns to scroll by when
        scrolling with a mouse wheel (|scroll-mouse-wheel|). The option is
        a comma-separated list. Each part consists of a direction and a count
        as follows:
        	direction:count,direction:count
        Direction is one of either "hor" or "ver". "hor" controls horizontal
        scrolling and "ver" controls vertical scrolling. Count sets the amount
        to scroll by for the given direction, it should be a non negative
        integer. Each direction should be set at most once. If a direction
        is omitted, a default value is used (6 for horizontal scrolling and 3
        for vertical scrolling). You can disable mouse scrolling by using
        a count of 0.

        Example: >vim
        	set mousescroll=ver:5,hor:2
        <	Will make Nvim scroll 5 lines at a time when scrolling vertically, and
        scroll 2 columns at a time when scrolling horizontally.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'mousescroll',
      list = 'comma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('amount to scroll by when scrolling with a mouse'),
      tags = { 'E5080' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_mousescroll',
      vi_def = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mouses',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      defaults = {
        if_true = '',
        doc = [["i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,
            m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow"]],
      },
      desc = [=[
        This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in
        different modes.  The option is a comma-separated list of parts, much
        like used for 'guicursor'.  Each part consist of a mode/location-list
        and an argument-list:
        	mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..
        The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:
        		In a normal window: ~
        	n	Normal mode
        	v	Visual mode
        	ve	Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
        		if not specified)
        	o	Operator-pending mode
        	i	Insert mode
        	r	Replace mode

        		Others: ~
        	c	appending to the command-line
        	ci	inserting in the command-line
        	cr	replacing in the command-line
        	m	at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts
        	ml	idem, but cursor in the last line
        	e	any mode, pointer below last window
        	s	any mode, pointer on a status line
        	sd	any mode, while dragging a status line
        	vs	any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line
        	vd	any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line
        	a	everywhere

        The shape is one of the following:
        avail	name		looks like ~
        w x	arrow		Normal mouse pointer
        w x	blank		no pointer at all (use with care!)
        w x	beam		I-beam
        w x	updown		up-down sizing arrows
        w x	leftright	left-right sizing arrows
        w x	busy		The system's usual busy pointer
        w x	no		The system's usual "no input" pointer
          x	udsizing	indicates up-down resizing
          x	lrsizing	indicates left-right resizing
          x	crosshair	like a big thin +
          x	hand1		black hand
          x	hand2		white hand
          x	pencil		what you write with
          x	question	big ?
          x	rightup-arrow	arrow pointing right-up
        w x	up-arrow	arrow pointing up
          x	<number>	any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)

        The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,
        x for X11.
        Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse
        pointer.

        Example: >vim
        	set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no
        <	will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and
        indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since
        clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)
      ]=],
      full_name = 'mouseshape',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('shape of the mouse pointer in different modes'),
      tags = { 'E547' },
      type = 'string',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'mouset',
      defaults = 500,
      desc = [=[
        Defines the maximum time in msec between two mouse clicks for the
        second click to be recognized as a multi click.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'mousetime',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('max time between mouse double-click'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_mouset',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'nf',
      defaults = 'bin,hex',
      values = { 'bin', 'octal', 'hex', 'alpha', 'unsigned', 'blank' },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
        CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
        respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
        alpha	If included, single alphabetical characters will be
        	incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
        	letter index a), b), etc.		*octal-nrformats*
        octal	If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
        	to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
        hex	If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
        	considered to be hexadecimal.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
        	"0x100" results in "0x0ff".
        bin	If included, numbers starting with "0b" or "0B" will be
        	considered to be binary.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
        	"0b1000" subtracts one, resulting in "0b0111".
        unsigned    If included, numbers are recognized as unsigned.  Thus a
        	leading dash or negative sign won't be considered as part of
        	the number.  Examples:
        	    Using CTRL-X on "2020" in "9-2020" results in "9-2019"
        	    (without "unsigned" it would become "9-2021").
        	    Using CTRL-A on "2020" in "9-2020" results in "9-2021"
        	    (without "unsigned" it would become "9-2019").
        	    Using CTRL-X on "0" or CTRL-A on "18446744073709551615"
        	    (2^64 - 1) has no effect, overflow is prevented.
        blank	If included, treat numbers as signed or unsigned based on
        	preceding whitespace.  If a number with a leading dash has its
        	dash immediately preceded by a non-whitespace character (i.e.,
        	not a tab or a " "), the negative sign won't be considered as
        	part of the number.  For example:
        	    Using CTRL-A on "14" in "Carbon-14" results in "Carbon-15"
        	    (without "blank" it would become "Carbon-13").
        	    Using CTRL-X on "8" in "Carbon -8" results in "Carbon -9"
        	    (because -8 is preceded by whitespace.  If "unsigned" was
        	    set, it would result in "Carbon -7").
        	If this format is included, overflow is prevented as if
        	"unsigned" were set.  If both this format and "unsigned" are
        	included, "unsigned" will take precedence.

        Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
        considered decimal.  This also happens for numbers that are not
        recognized as octal or hex.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'nrformats',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('number formats recognized for CTRL-A command'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_nf',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'nu',
      cb = 'did_set_number_relativenumber',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Print the line number in front of each line.  When the 'n' option is
        excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
        line numbers.
        Use the 'numberwidth' option to adjust the room for the line number.
        When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
        characters are put before the number.
        For highlighting see |hl-LineNr|, |hl-CursorLineNr|, and the
        |:sign-define| "numhl" argument.
        					*number_relativenumber*
        The 'relativenumber' option changes the displayed number to be
        relative to the cursor.  Together with 'number' there are these
        four combinations (cursor in line 3):

        	'nonu'          'nu'            'nonu'          'nu'
        	'nornu'         'nornu'         'rnu'           'rnu'
        >
            |apple          |  1 apple      |  2 apple      |  2 apple
            |pear           |  2 pear       |  1 pear       |  1 pear
            |nobody         |  3 nobody     |  0 nobody     |3   nobody
            |there          |  4 there      |  1 there      |  1 there
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'number',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('print the line number in front of each line'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'nuw',
      cb = 'did_set_numberwidth',
      defaults = 4,
      desc = [=[
        Minimal number of columns to use for the line number.  Only relevant
        when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines
        with a line number.  Since one space is always between the number and
        the text, there is one less character for the number itself.
        The value is the minimum width.  A bigger width is used when needed to
        fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of
        rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber'
        is set.  Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line
        number up to 999.  When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be
        used. The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 20.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'numberwidth',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('number of columns used for the line number'),
      type = 'number',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ofu',
      cb = 'did_set_omnifunc',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni
        completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|
        See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
        invoked and what it should return.  The value can be the name of a
        function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for
        more information.
        This option is usually set by a filetype plugin:
        |:filetype-plugin-on|
      ]=],
      full_name = 'omnifunc',
      func = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('function for filetype-specific completion'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ofu',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'odev',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        		only for Windows
        Enable reading and writing from devices.  This may get Vim stuck on a
        device that can be opened but doesn't actually do the I/O.  Therefore
        it is off by default.
        Note that on Windows editing "aux.h", "lpt1.txt" and the like also
        result in editing a device.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'opendevice',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('allow reading/writing devices on MS-Windows'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'opfunc',
      cb = 'did_set_operatorfunc',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator.
        See |:map-operator| for more info and an example.  The value can be
        the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See
        |option-value-function| for more information.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'operatorfunc',
      func = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('function to be called for |g@| operator'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_opfunc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pp',
      cb = 'did_set_runtimepackpath',
      defaults = {
        if_true = '',
        doc = "see 'runtimepath'",
        meta = '...',
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Directories used to find packages.
        See |packages| and |packages-runtimepath|.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'packpath',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('list of directories used for packages'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_pp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'para',
      defaults = 'IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp',
      desc = [=[
        Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs.  These are pairs
        of two letters (see |object-motions|).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'paragraphs',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('nroff macros that separate paragraphs'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_para',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_paste',
      defaults = false,
      full_name = 'paste',
      pri_mkrc = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_paste',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pt',
      defaults = '',
      full_name = 'pastetoggle',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'string',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pex',
      cb = 'did_set_optexpr',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
        the resulting new version of the file.  See |diff-patchexpr|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'patchexpr',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('expression used to patch a file'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_pex',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pm',
      cb = 'did_set_backupext_or_patchmode',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept.  This can be used
        to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
        source distribution.  Only the first time that a file is written a
        copy of the original file will be kept.  The name of the copy is the
        name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
        appended.  This option should start with a dot.  Use a string like
        ".orig" or ".org".  'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work
        (Detail: The backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the
        new file has been successfully written, that's why it must be possible
        to write a backup file).  If there was no file to be backed up, an
        empty file is created.
        When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
        Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
        end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
        recognized as a compressed file.
        Only normal file name characters can be used, `/\*?[|<>` are illegal.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'patchmode',
      normal_fname_chars = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('keep the oldest version of a file'),
      tags = { 'E205', 'E206' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_pm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pa',
      defaults = '.,,',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
        |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find|, |:sfind|, |:tabfind| and other commands,
        provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not
        starting with "/", "./" or "../").  The directories in the 'path'
        option may be relative or absolute.
        - Use commas to separate directory names: >vim
        	set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
        <	- Spaces can also be used to separate directory names.  To have a
          space in a directory name, precede it with an extra backslash, and
          escape the space: >vim
        	set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
        <	- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
          backslash: >vim
        	set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
        <	- To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >vim
        	set path=.
        <	- To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
          commas: >vim
        	set path=,,
        <	- A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
        - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        - When using |netrw| URLs can be used.  For example, adding
          "https://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
        - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and
          ";".  See |file-searching| for info and syntax.
        - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >vim
        	set path=.,c:\\include
        <	  Or just use '/' instead: >vim
        	set path=.,c:/include
        <	Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
        the file!
        The maximum length is limited.  How much depends on the system, mostly
        it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
        You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
        'path', see |:checkpath|.
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.  To remove the current directory use: >vim
        	set path-=
        <	To add the current directory use: >vim
        	set path+=
        <	To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
        separator.  Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
        names are separated with a semicolon: >vim
        	let &path = &path .. "," .. substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
        <	Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used.  Note that
        this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'path',
      list = 'comma',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('list of directories searched with "gf" et.al.'),
      tags = { 'E343', 'E345', 'E347', 'E854' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_path',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pi',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
        indent structure as possible.  Normally the indent is replaced by a
        series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless 'expandtab' is
        enabled, in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option
        means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
        for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
        'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains
        a Tab.
        NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
        tabs and spaces.  You might not like this.
        Also see 'copyindent'.
        Use |:retab| to clean up white space.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'preserveindent',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('preserve the indent structure when reindenting'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_pi',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pvh',
      defaults = 12,
      desc = [=[
        Default height for a preview window.  Used for |:ptag| and associated
        commands.  Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'previewheight',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('height of the preview window'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_pvh',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pvw',
      cb = 'did_set_previewwindow',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Identifies the preview window.  Only one window can have this option
        set.  It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
        |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'previewwindow',
      noglob = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('identifies the preview window'),
      tags = { 'E590' },
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      defaults = true,
      full_name = 'prompt',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('enable prompt in Ex mode'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pb',
      cb = 'did_set_pumblend',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Enables pseudo-transparency for the |popup-menu|. Valid values are in
        the range of 0 for fully opaque popupmenu (disabled) to 100 for fully
        transparent background. Values between 0-30 are typically most useful.

        It is possible to override the level for individual highlights within
        the popupmenu using |highlight-blend|. For instance, to enable
        transparency but force the current selected element to be fully opaque: >vim

        	set pumblend=15
        	hi PmenuSel blend=0
        <
        UI-dependent. Works best with RGB colors. 'termguicolors'
      ]=],
      full_name = 'pumblend',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Controls transparency level of popup menu'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_pb',
    },
    {
      full_name = 'pumborder',
      scope = { 'global' },
      cb = 'did_set_pumborder',
      defaults = { if_true = '' },
      values = { '', 'double', 'single', 'shadow', 'rounded', 'solid', 'bold', 'none' },
      desc = [=[
        Defines the default border style of popupmenu windows. See 'winborder' for
        valid values. |hl-PmenuBorder| is used for highlighting the border, and when
        style is "shadow" the |hl-PmenuShadow| and |hl-PmenuShadowThrough| groups are used.

        This option also applies to mouse popup menus when 'mousemodel' is set to
        "popup" or "popup_setpos", which will display borders using the same style.
      ]=],
      short_desc = N_('border of popupmenu'),
      type = 'string',
      list = 'onecomma',
      varname = 'p_pumborder',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ph',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum number of items to show in the popup menu
        (|ins-completion-menu|). Zero means "use available screen space".
      ]=],
      full_name = 'pumheight',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum height of the popup menu'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_ph',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pmw',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum width for the popup menu (|ins-completion-menu|).  When zero,
        there is no maximum width limit, otherwise the popup menu will never be
        wider than this value.  Truncated text will be indicated by "trunc"
        value of 'fillchars' option.

        This option takes precedence over 'pumwidth'.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'pummaxwidth',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum width of the popup menu'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_pmw',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pw',
      defaults = 15,
      desc = [=[
        Minimum width for the popup menu (|ins-completion-menu|).  If the
        cursor column + 'pumwidth' exceeds screen width, the popup menu is
        nudged to fit on the screen.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'pumwidth',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('minimum width of the popup menu'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_pw',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'pyx',
      defaults = 3,
      desc = [=[
        Specifies the python version used for pyx* functions and commands
        |python_x|.  As only Python 3 is supported, this always has the value
        `3`. Setting any other value is an error.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'pyxversion',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('selects default python version to use'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_pyx',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'qftf',
      cb = 'did_set_quickfixtextfunc',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        This option specifies a function to be used to get the text to display
        in the quickfix and location list windows.  This can be used to
        customize the information displayed in the quickfix or location window
        for each entry in the corresponding quickfix or location list.  See
        |quickfix-window-function| for an explanation of how to write the
        function and an example.  The value can be the name of a function, a
        |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for more
        information.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'qftf' |textlock|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'quickfixtextfunc',
      func = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('customize the quickfix window'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_qftf',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'qe',
      defaults = '\\',
      desc = [=[
        The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string.  Used for
        objects like a', a" and a` |a'|.
        When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string,
        the following character will be skipped.  The default value makes the
        text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'quoteescape',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('escape characters used in a string'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_qe',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ro',
      cb = 'did_set_readonly',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'.  Protects you from
        accidentally overwriting a file.  Default on when Vim is started
        in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
        When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current
        buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'.
        When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is set for the
        newly edited buffer.
        See 'modifiable' for disallowing changes to the buffer.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'readonly',
      noglob = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('disallow writing the buffer'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ro',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'rdb',
      defaults = '',
      values = {
        'compositor',
        'nothrottle',
        'invalid',
        'nodelta',
        'line',
        'flush',
      },
      flags = true,
      desc = [=[
        Flags to change the way redrawing works, for debugging purposes.
        Most useful with 'writedelay' set to some reasonable value.
        Supports the following flags:
            compositor	Indicate each redraw event handled by the compositor
        		by briefly flashing the redrawn regions in colors
        		indicating the redraw type. These are the highlight
        		groups used (and their default colors):
        	RedrawDebugNormal   gui=reverse   normal redraw passed through
        	RedrawDebugClear    guibg=Yellow  clear event passed through
        	RedrawDebugComposed guibg=Green   redraw event modified by the
        					  compositor (due to
        					  overlapping grids, etc)
        	RedrawDebugRecompose guibg=Red    redraw generated by the
        					  compositor itself, due to a
        					  grid being moved or deleted.
            line	introduce a delay after each line drawn on the screen.
        		When using the TUI or another single-grid UI, "compositor"
        		gives more information and should be preferred (every
        		line is processed as a separate event by the compositor)
            flush	introduce a delay after each "flush" event.
            nothrottle	Turn off throttling of the message grid. This is an
        		optimization that joins many small scrolls to one
        		larger scroll when drawing the message area (with
        		'display' msgsep flag active).
            invalid	Enable stricter checking (abort) of inconsistencies
        		of the internal screen state. This is mostly
        		useful when running nvim inside a debugger (and
        		the test suite).
            nodelta	Send all internally redrawn cells to the UI, even if
        		they are unchanged from the already displayed state.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'redrawdebug',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Changes the way redrawing works (debug)'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_rdb',
      flags_varname = 'rdb_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'rdt',
      defaults = 2000,
      desc = [=[
        Time in milliseconds for redrawing the display.  Applies to
        'hlsearch', 'inccommand', |:match| highlighting, syntax highlighting,
        and async |LanguageTree:parse()|.
        When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further
        matches will be highlighted.
        For syntax highlighting the time applies per window.  When over the
        limit syntax highlighting is disabled until |CTRL-L| is used.
        This is used to avoid that Vim hangs when using a very complicated
        pattern.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'redrawtime',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("timeout for 'hlsearch' and |:match| highlighting"),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_rdt',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 're',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        This selects the default regexp engine. |two-engines|
        The possible values are:
        	0	automatic selection
        	1	old engine
        	2	NFA engine
        Note that when using the NFA engine and the pattern contains something
        that is not supported the pattern will not match.  This is only useful
        for debugging the regexp engine.
        Using automatic selection enables Vim to switch the engine, if the
        default engine becomes too costly.  E.g., when the NFA engine uses too
        many states.  This should prevent Vim from hanging on a combination of
        a complex pattern with long text.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'regexpengine',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('default regexp engine to use'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_re',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'rnu',
      cb = 'did_set_number_relativenumber',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of
        each line.  Relative line numbers help you use the |count| you can
        precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without
        having to calculate it yourself.  Especially useful in combination
        with other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =).
        When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will
        not use the column of line numbers.
        The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
        number.
        When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
        characters are put before the number.
        See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
        the number.

        The number in front of the cursor line also depends on the value of
        'number', see |number_relativenumber| for all combinations of the two
        options.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'relativenumber',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('show relative line number in front of each line'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      defaults = true,
      full_name = 'remap',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      defaults = 2,
      desc = [=[
        Threshold for reporting number of lines changed.  When the number of
        changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
        ":" commands.  If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
        For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
        instead of the number of lines.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'report',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('for reporting nr. of lines changed'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_report',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ri',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards.  See "typing
        backwards" |ins-reverse|.  This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
        command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'revins',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('inserting characters will work backwards'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ri',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'rl',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters
        that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
        Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
        are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
        This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
        simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
        useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
        and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
        in different windows).  Also see |rileft.txt|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'rightleft',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('window is right-to-left oriented'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'rlc',
      defaults = 'search',
      values = { 'search' },
      desc = [=[
        Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
        right-to-left mode for a group of commands:

        	search		"/" and "?" commands

        This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
        The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'rightleftcmd',
      list = 'comma',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('commands for which editing works right-to-left'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ru',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
        comma.  When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
        text in the file is shown on the far right:
        	Top	first line is visible
        	Bot	last line is visible
        	All	first and last line are visible
        	45%	relative position in the file
        If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
        Each window has its own ruler.  If a window has a status line, the
        ruler is shown there.  If a window doesn't have a status line and
        'cmdheight' is zero, the ruler is not shown.  Otherwise it is shown in
        the last line of the screen.  If the statusline is given by
        'statusline' (i.e. not empty), this option takes precedence over
        'ruler' and 'rulerformat'.
        If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
        bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multibyte character), both
        the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
        separated with a dash.
        For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
        For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
        If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
        you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'ruler',
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('show cursor line and column in the status line'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ru',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ruf',
      cb = 'did_set_rulerformat',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
        string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
        The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.
        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

        The default ruler width is 17 characters.  To make the ruler 15
        characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
        Example: >vim
        	set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'rulerformat',
      modelineexpr = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('custom format for the ruler'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ruf',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'rtp',
      cb = 'did_set_runtimepackpath',
      defaults = {
        if_true = '',
        doc = [["$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/nvim,
                     $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[1]/nvim,
                     $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[2]/nvim,
                     …
                     $XDG_DATA_HOME/nvim[-data]/site,
                     $XDG_DATA_DIRS[1]/nvim/site,
                     $XDG_DATA_DIRS[2]/nvim/site,
                     …
                     $VIMRUNTIME,
                     …
                     $XDG_DATA_DIRS[2]/nvim/site/after,
                     $XDG_DATA_DIRS[1]/nvim/site/after,
                     $XDG_DATA_HOME/nvim[-data]/site/after,
                     …
                     $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[2]/nvim/after,
                     $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS[1]/nvim/after,
                     $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/nvim/after"]],
        meta = '...',
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        List of directories to be searched for these runtime files:
          filetype.lua	filetypes |new-filetype|
          autoload/	automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions|
          colors/	color scheme files |:colorscheme|
          compiler/	compiler files |:compiler|
          doc/		documentation |write-local-help|
          ftplugin/	filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
          indent/	indent scripts |indent-expression|
          keymap/	key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
          lang/		menu translations |:menutrans|
          lsp/		LSP client configurations |lsp-config|
          lua/		|Lua| plugins
          menu.vim	GUI menus |menu.vim|
          pack/		packages |:packadd|
          parser/	|treesitter| syntax parsers
          plugin/	plugin scripts |write-plugin|
          queries/	|treesitter| queries
          rplugin/	|remote-plugin| scripts
          spell/	spell checking files |spell|
          syntax/	syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
          tutor/	tutorial files |:Tutor|

        And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.

        Defaults are setup to search these locations:
        1. Your home directory, for personal preferences.
           Given by `stdpath("config")`.  |$XDG_CONFIG_HOME|
        2. Directories which must contain configuration files according to
           |xdg| ($XDG_CONFIG_DIRS, defaults to /etc/xdg).  This also contains
           preferences from system administrator.
        3. Data home directory, for plugins installed by user.
           Given by `stdpath("data")/site`.  |$XDG_DATA_HOME|
        4. nvim/site subdirectories for each directory in $XDG_DATA_DIRS.
           This is for plugins which were installed by system administrator,
           but are not part of the Nvim distribution. XDG_DATA_DIRS defaults
           to /usr/local/share/:/usr/share/, so system administrators are
           expected to install site plugins to /usr/share/nvim/site.
        5. $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Nvim.
        						*after-directory*
        6, 7, 8, 9. In after/ subdirectories of 1, 2, 3 and 4, with reverse
           ordering.  This is for preferences to overrule or add to the
           distributed defaults or system-wide settings (rarely needed).

        						*packages-runtimepath*
        "start" packages will also be searched (|runtime-search-path|) for
        runtime files after these, though such packages are not explicitly
        reported in &runtimepath. But "opt" packages are explicitly added to
        &runtimepath by |:packadd|.

        Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed.  Normal
        wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
        runtime files.  For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
        wildcards.
        See |:runtime|.
        Example: >vim
        	set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
        <	This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
        personal Nvim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim", and finally
        "$VIMRUNTIME" (the default runtime files).
        You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME to find files which replace
        distributed runtime files.  You can put a directory after $VIMRUNTIME
        to find files which add to distributed runtime files.

        With |--clean| the home directory entries are not included.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
      ]=],
      expand = 'nodefault',
      full_name = 'runtimepath',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('list of directories used for runtime files'),
      tags = { 'vimfiles' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_rtp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'scr',
      defaults = {
        if_true = 0,
        doc = 'half the window height',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands.  Will be
        set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
        changes.  This may happen when enabling the |status-line| or
        'tabline' option after setting the 'scroll' option.
        If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
        be used as the new value for 'scroll'.  Reset to half the window
        height with ":set scroll=0".
      ]=],
      full_name = 'scroll',
      no_mkrc = true,
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D'),
      type = 'number',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'scbk',
      cb = 'did_set_scrollback',
      defaults = {
        if_true = -1,
        doc = '10000',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Maximum number of lines kept beyond the visible screen. Lines at the
        top are deleted if new lines exceed this limit.
        Minimum is 1, maximum is 1000000.
        Only in |terminal| buffers.

        Note: Lines that are not visible and kept in scrollback are not
        reflown when the terminal buffer is resized horizontally.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'scrollback',
      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_scbk',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'scb',
      cb = 'did_set_scrollbind',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        See also |scroll-binding|.  When this option is set, scrolling the
        current window also scrolls other scrollbind windows (windows that
        also have this option set).  This option is useful for viewing the
        differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
        See 'scrollopt' for options that determine how this option should be
        interpreted.
        This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
        file.  This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
        with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'scrollbind',
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('scroll in window as other windows scroll'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sj',
      defaults = 1,
      desc = [=[
        Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
        screen (e.g., with "j").  Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
        CTRL-D).  Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
        When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the
        percentage of the window height.  Thus -50 scrolls half the window
        height.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'scrolljump',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines to scroll'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_sj',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'so',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
        This will make some context visible around where you are working.  If
        you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
        in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
        when long lines wrap).
        After using the local value, go back the global value with one of
        these two: >vim
        	setlocal scrolloff<
        	setlocal scrolloff=-1
        <	For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'scrolloff',
      scope = { 'global', 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('minimum nr. of lines above and below cursor'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_so',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sbo',
      defaults = 'ver,jump',
      values = { 'ver', 'hor', 'jump' },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
        'scrollbind' windows should behave.  'sbo' stands for ScrollBind
        Options.
        The following words are available:
            ver		Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
            hor		Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
            jump	Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
        		scrolling.  This offset is the difference in the first
        		displayed line of the bound windows.  When moving
        		around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
        		reach a position before the start or after the end of
        		the buffer.  The offset is not changed though, when
        		moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
        		to the desired position when possible.
        		When now making that window the current one, two
        		things can be done with the relative offset:
        		1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
        		   adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
        		   window.  When going back to the other window, the
        		   new relative offset will be used.
        		2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
        		   scrolled to keep the same relative offset.  When
        		   going back to the other window, it still uses the
        		   same relative offset.
        Also see |scroll-binding|.
        When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding,
        even when "ver" isn't there.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'scrollopt',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("how 'scrollbind' should behave"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sbo',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sect',
      defaults = 'SHNHH HUnhsh',
      desc = [=[
        Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections.  These are pairs of
        two letters (See |object-motions|).  The default makes a section start
        at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".
      ]=],
      full_name = 'sections',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('nroff macros that separate sections'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sections',
    },
    {
      defaults = false,
      full_name = 'secure',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_secure',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sel',
      cb = 'did_set_selection',
      defaults = 'inclusive',
      values = { 'inclusive', 'exclusive', 'old' },
      desc = [=[
        This option defines the behavior of the selection.  It is only used
        in Visual and Select mode.
        Possible values:
           value	past line     inclusive ~
           old		   no		yes
           inclusive	   yes		yes
           exclusive	   yes		no
        "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
        character past the line.
        "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
        in an operation.  For example, when "x" is used to delete the
        selection.
        When "old" is used and 'virtualedit' allows the cursor to move past
        the end of line the line break still isn't included.
        When "exclusive" is used, cursor position in visual mode will be
        adjusted for inclusive motions |inclusive-motion-selection-exclusive|.

        Note:
        - When "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end backwards, you
          cannot include the last character of a line, when starting in Normal
          mode and 'virtualedit' empty.
        - when "exclusive" is used with a single character visual selection,
          Vim will behave as if the 'selection' is inclusive (in other words,
          you cannot visually select an empty region).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'selection',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('what type of selection to use'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sel',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'slm',
      defaults = '',
      values = { 'mouse', 'key', 'cmd' },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This is a comma-separated list of words, which specifies when to start
        Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
        Possible values:
           mouse	when using the mouse
           key		when using shifted special keys
           cmd		when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
        See |Select-mode|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'selectmode',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('when to use Select mode instead of Visual mode'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_slm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ssop',
      cb = 'did_set_sessionoptions',
      defaults = 'blank,buffers,curdir,folds,help,tabpages,winsize,terminal',
      -- Also used for 'viewoptions'.
      values = {
        'buffers',
        'winpos',
        'resize',
        'winsize',
        'localoptions',
        'options',
        'help',
        'blank',
        'globals',
        'slash',
        'unix',
        'sesdir',
        'curdir',
        'folds',
        'cursor',
        'tabpages',
        'terminal',
        'skiprtp',
      },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command.  It is a comma-
        separated list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring
        something:
           word		save and restore ~
           blank	empty windows
           buffers	hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
           curdir	the current directory
           folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
        		fold options
           globals	global variables that start with an uppercase letter
        		and contain at least one lowercase letter.  Only
        		String and Number types are stored.
           help		the help window
           localoptions	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
        		global values for local options)
           options	all options and mappings (also global values for local
        		options)
           skiprtp	exclude 'runtimepath' and 'packpath' from the options
           resize	size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
           sesdir	the directory in which the session file is located
        		will become the current directory (useful with
        		projects accessed over a network from different
        		systems)
           tabpages	all tab pages; without this only the current tab page
        		is restored, so that you can make a session for each
        		tab page separately
           terminal	include terminal windows where the command can be
        		restored
           winpos	position of the whole Vim window
           winsize	window sizes
           slash	|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "/" in filenames.
           unix		|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "\n" line endings.

        Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir". When neither is included
        filenames are stored as absolute paths.
        If you leave out "options" many things won't work well after restoring
        the session.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'sessionoptions',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('options for |:mksession|'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ssop',
      flags_varname = 'ssop_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sd',
      alias = { 'vi', 'viminfo' },
      cb = 'did_set_shada',
      defaults = "!,'100,<50,s10,h,r/tmp/,r/private/",
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        When non-empty, the shada file is read upon startup and written
        when exiting Vim (see |shada-file|).  The string should be a comma-
        separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
        identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
        which specifies the value of that parameter.  If a particular
        character is left out, then the default value is used for that
        parameter.  The following is a list of the identifying characters and
        the effect of their value.
        CHAR	VALUE	~
        						*shada-!*
        !	When included, save and restore global variables that start
        	with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
        	letter.  Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
        	and "_K_L_M" are not.  Nested List and Dict items may not be
        	read back correctly, you end up with an empty item.
        						*shada-quote*
        "	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  Old name of
        	the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
        	backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
        	start of a comment!
        						*shada-%*
        %	When included, save and restore the buffer list.  If Vim is
        	started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
        	restored.  If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
        	buffer list is restored from the shada file.  Quickfix
        	('buftype'), unlisted ('buflisted'), unnamed and buffers on
        	removable media (|shada-r|) are not saved.
        	When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
        	number of buffers that are stored.  Without a number all
        	buffers are stored.
        						*shada-'*
        '	Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
        	are remembered.  This parameter must always be included when
        	'shada' is non-empty.
        	If non-zero, then the |jumplist| and the |changelist| are also
        	stored in the shada file.
        						*shada-/*
        /	Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
        	saved.  If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
        	patterns are also saved.  When not included, the value of
        	'history' is used.
        						*shada-:*
        :	Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
        	saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
        						*shada-<*
        \<	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  If zero then
        	registers are not saved.  When not included, all lines are
        	saved.  '"' is the old name for this item.
        	Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in KiB.
        						*shada-@*
        @	Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
        	saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
        						*shada-c*
        c	Dummy option, kept for compatibility reasons.  Has no actual
        	effect: ShaDa always uses UTF-8 and 'encoding' value is fixed
        	to UTF-8 as well.
        						*shada-f*
        f	Whether file marks need to be stored.  If zero, file marks ('0
        	to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored.  When not present or when
        	non-zero, they are all stored.  '0 is used for the current
        	cursor position (when exiting or when doing |:wshada|).
        						*shada-h*
        h	Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the shada
        	file.  When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
        	has been used since the last search command.
        						*shada-n*
        n	Name of the shada file.  The name must immediately follow
        	the 'n'.  Must be at the end of the option!  If the
        	'shadafile' option is set, that file name overrides the one
        	given here with 'shada'.  Environment variables are
        	expanded when opening the file, not when setting the option.
        						*shada-r*
        r	Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
        	',').  This parameter can be given several times.  Each
        	specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
        	stored.  This is to avoid removable media.  For Windows you
        	could use "ra:,rb:".  You can also use it for temp files,
        	e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp".  Case is ignored.
        						*shada-s*
        s	Maximum size of an item contents in KiB.  If zero then nothing
        	is saved.  Unlike Vim this applies to all items, except for
        	the buffer list and header.  Full item size is off by three
        	unsigned integers: with `s10` maximum item size may be 1 byte
        	(type: 7-bit integer) + 9 bytes (timestamp: up to 64-bit
        	integer) + 3 bytes (item size: up to 16-bit integer because
        	2^8 < 10240 < 2^16) + 10240 bytes (requested maximum item
        	contents size) = 10253 bytes.

        Example: >vim
            set shada='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/nvim/shada
        <
        '50		Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
        		edited.
        <1000		Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
        		remembered.
        s100		Items with contents occupying more then 100 KiB are
        		skipped.
        :0		Command-line history will not be saved.
        n~/nvim/shada	The name of the file to use is "~/nvim/shada".
        no /		Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
        		that is, save all of the search history, and also the
        		previous search and substitute patterns.
        no %		The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
        no h		'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.

        When setting 'shada' from an empty value you can use |:rshada| to
        load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'shada',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('use .shada file upon startup and exiting'),
      tags = { 'E526', 'E527', 'E528' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_shada',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sdf',
      alias = { 'vif', 'viminfofile' },
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        When non-empty, overrides the file name used for |shada| (viminfo).
        When equal to "NONE" no shada file will be read or written.
        This option can be set with the |-i| command line flag.  The |--clean|
        command line flag sets it to "NONE".
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'shadafile',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('overrides the filename used for shada'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_shadafile',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sh',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'MSWIN',
        if_false = 'sh',
        if_true = 'cmd.exe',
        doc = '$SHELL or "sh", Win32: "cmd.exe"',
        meta = 'sh',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands.  When changing the
        value also check these options: 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
        'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
        It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g.  "csh -f".
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.

        If the name of the shell contains a space, you need to enclose it in
        quotes.  Example with quotes: >vim
        	set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
        <	Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
        each space (to avoid ending the option value), so better use |:let-&|
        like this: >vim
        	let &shell='"C:\Program Files\unix\sh.exe" -f'
        <	Also note that the "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not
        part of the command name.
        						*shell-unquoting*
        Rules regarding quotes:
        1. Option is split on space and tab characters that are not inside
           quotes: "abc def" runs shell named "abc" with additional argument
           "def", '"abc def"' runs shell named "abc def" with no additional
           arguments (here and below: additional means “additional to
           'shellcmdflag'”).
        2. Quotes in option may be present in any position and any number:
           '"abc"', '"a"bc', 'a"b"c', 'ab"c"' and '"a"b"c"' are all equivalent
           to just "abc".
        3. Inside quotes backslash preceding backslash means one backslash.
           Backslash preceding quote means one quote. Backslash preceding
           anything else means backslash and next character literally:
           '"a\\b"' is the same as "a\b", '"a\\"b"' runs shell named literally
           'a"b', '"a\b"' is the same as "a\b" again.
        4. Outside of quotes backslash always means itself, it cannot be used
           to escape quote: 'a\"b"' is the same as "a\b".
        Note that such processing is done after |:set| did its own round of
        unescaping, so to keep yourself sane use |:let-&| like shown above.
        						*shell-powershell*
        To use PowerShell: >vim
           set noshelltemp
           let &shell = 'powershell'
           let &shellcmdflag = '-NoLogo -NoProfile -ExecutionPolicy RemoteSigned -Command '
           let &shellcmdflag .= '[Console]::InputEncoding=[Console]::OutputEncoding=[System.Text.UTF8Encoding]::new();'
           let &shellcmdflag .= '$PSDefaultParameterValues[''Out-File:Encoding'']=''utf8'';'
           let &shellpipe  = '> %s 2>&1'
           set shellquote= shellxquote=
        <
        						*shell-pwsh*
        To use pwsh, use the above settings with `let &shell = 'pwsh'`, and
        add: >vim
           let &shellcmdflag .= '$PSStyle.OutputRendering = ''PlainText'';'
           " Workaround (may not be needed in future version of pwsh):
           let $__SuppressAnsiEscapeSequences = 1
        <
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'shell',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('name of shell to use for external commands'),
      tags = { 'E91' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sh',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'shcf',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'MSWIN',
        if_false = '-c',
        if_true = '/s /c',
        doc = '"-c"; Windows: "/s /c"',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
        `bash.exe -c ls` or `cmd.exe /s /c "dir"`.  For MS-Windows, the
        default is set according to the value of 'shell', to reduce the need
        to set this option by the user.
        On Unix it can have more than one flag.  Each white space separated
        part is passed as an argument to the shell command.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
        See |shell-unquoting| which talks about separating this option into
        multiple arguments.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'shellcmdflag',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('flag to shell to execute one command'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_shcf',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sp',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'MSWIN',
        if_false = '| tee',
        if_true = '2>&1| tee',
        doc = '">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee"',
      },
      desc = [=[
        String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
        error file.  See also |:make_makeprg|.  See |option-backslash| about
        including spaces and backslashes.
        The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
        (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
        of this option).
        For MS-Windows the default is "2>&1| tee".  The stdout and stderr are
        saved in a file and echoed to the screen.
        For Unix the default is "| tee".  The stdout of the compiler is saved
        in a file and echoed to the screen.  If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
        "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee".  If the
        'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh", "zsh-beta",
        "bash", "fish", "ash" or "dash" the default becomes "2>&1| tee".  This
        means that stderr is also included.  Before using the 'shell' option a
        path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses "sh".
        The initialization of this option is done after reading the vimrc
        and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
        there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
        explicitly set before.
        When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
        ":make" output will be done.  This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
        that writes to 'makeef' by itself.  If you want no piping, but do
        want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
        Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
        In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
        become obsolete (at least for Unix).
        Note: When using a pipe like "| tee", you'll lose the exit code of the
        shell command.  This might be configurable by your shell, look for
        the pipefail option (for bash and zsh, use ":set -o pipefail").
      ]=],
      full_name = 'shellpipe',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('string to put output of ":make" in error file'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'shq',
      defaults = {
        if_true = '',
        doc = [[""; Windows, when 'shell'
               contains "sh" somewhere: "\""]],
      },
      desc = [=[
        Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
        the "!" and ":!" commands.  The redirection is kept outside of the
        quoting.  See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection.  It's
        probably not useful to set both options.
        This is an empty string by default.  Only known to be useful for
        third-party shells on Windows systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
        or bash, where it should be "\"".  The default is adjusted according
        the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
        user.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'shellquote',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('quote character(s) for around shell command'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_shq',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'srr',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'MSWIN',
        if_false = '>',
        if_true = '>%s 2>&1',
        doc = '">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1"',
      },
      desc = [=[
        String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
        file.  See also |:!|.  See |option-backslash| about including spaces
        and backslashes.
        The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
        (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
        of this option).
        The default is ">".  For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh" or
        "tcsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&".  If the
        'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh", "zsh-beta",
        "bash" or "fish", the default becomes ">%s 2>&1".  This means that
        stderr is also included.  For Win32, the Unix checks are done and
        additionally "cmd" is checked for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1".
        Also, the same names with ".exe" appended are checked for.
        The initialization of this option is done after reading the vimrc
        and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
        there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
        explicitly set before.
        In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
        become obsolete (at least for Unix).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'shellredir',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('string to put output of filter in a temp file'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_srr',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ssl',
      cb = 'did_set_shellslash',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'MSWIN',
        if_true = false,
        if_false = true,
        doc = 'on, Windows: off',
      },
      desc = [=[
        		only modifiable in MS-Windows
        When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names.  This is
        useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of cmd.exe.  Backward
        slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to forward slashes by
        Vim.
        Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
        existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
        any file for best results.  This might change in the future.
        'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
        separator.  To test if this is so use: >vim
        	if exists('+shellslash')
        <	Also see 'completeslash'.
      ]=],
      enable_if = 'BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME',
      full_name = 'shellslash',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('use forward slash for shell file names'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ssl',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'stmp',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on, use temp files for shell commands.  When off use a pipe.
        When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway.
        The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file
        and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection.
        The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding
        can be detected.
        The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|,
        |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when
        'shelltemp' is off.
        |system()| does not respect this option, it always uses pipes.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'shelltemp',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('whether to use a temp file for shell commands'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_stmp',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sxe',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When 'shellxquote' is set to "(" then the characters listed in this
        option will be escaped with a '^' character.  This makes it possible
        to execute most external commands with cmd.exe.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'shellxescape',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_("characters to escape when 'shellxquote' is ("),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sxe',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sxq',
      defaults = {
        condition = 'MSWIN',
        if_false = '',
        if_true = '"',
        doc = '"", Windows: "\\""',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
        the "!" and ":!" commands.  Includes the redirection.  See
        'shellquote' to exclude the redirection.  It's probably not useful
        to set both options.
        When the value is '(' then ')' is appended.  When the value is '"('
        then ')"' is appended.
        When the value is '(' then also see 'shellxescape'.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'shellxquote',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_("like 'shellquote', but include redirection"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sxq',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sr',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'.  Applies to > and <
        commands.  CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
        a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'shiftround',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('round indent to multiple of shiftwidth'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_sr',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sw',
      cb = 'did_set_shiftwidth_tabstop',
      defaults = 8,
      desc = [=[
        Number of columns that make up one level of (auto)indentation.  Used
        by 'cindent', |<<|, |>>|, etc.
        If set to 0, Vim uses the current 'tabstop' value.  Use |shiftwidth()|
        to obtain the effective value in scripts.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'shiftwidth',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('number of spaces to use for (auto)indent step'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_sw',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'shm',
      cb = 'did_set_shortmess',
      defaults = 'ltToOCF',
      desc = [=[
        Controls display of file messages (e.g. CTRL-G) and various other
        messages.

        It is a list of flags:
         flag	meaning when present	~
          l	use "999L, 888B" instead of "999 lines, 888 bytes"	*shm-l*
          m	use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"			*shm-m*
          r	use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"			*shm-r*
          w	use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message	*shm-w*
        	and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
          a	all of the above abbreviations				*shm-a*

          o	overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent	*shm-o*
        	message for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when
        	'autowrite' on)
          O	message for reading a file overwrites any previous	*shm-O*
        	message;  also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn")
          s	don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or	*shm-s*
        	"search hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages; when using
        	the search count do not show "W" before the count message
        	(see |shm-S| below)
          t	truncate file message at the start if it is too long	*shm-t*
        	to fit on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most
        	column; ignored in Ex mode
          T	truncate other messages in the middle if they are too	*shm-T*
        	long to fit on the command line; "..." will appear in the
        	middle; ignored in Ex mode
          W	don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file	*shm-W*
          A	don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing	*shm-A*
        	swap file is found
          I	don't give the intro message when starting Vim,		*shm-I*
        	see |:intro|
          c	don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages; for		*shm-c*
        	example, "-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only
        	match", "Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc.
          C	don't give messages while scanning for ins-completion	*shm-C*
        	items, for instance "scanning tags"
          q	do not show "recording @a" when recording a macro	*shm-q*
          F	don't give the file info when editing a file, like	*shm-F*
        	`:silent` was used for the command; note that this also
        	affects messages from 'autoread' reloading
          S	do not show search count message when searching, e.g.	*shm-S*
        	"[1/5]".  When the "S" flag is not present (e.g. search count
        	is shown), the "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" and
        	"search hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages are only
        	indicated by a "W" (Mnemonic: Wrapped) letter before the
        	search count statistics.  The maximum limit can be set with
        	the 'maxsearchcount' option, see also |searchcount()|
        	function.

        This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
        requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
        possible for the space available.  To get the whole message that you
        would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
        Useful values:
            shm=	No abbreviation of message.
            shm=a	Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
            shm=at	Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_shortmess',
      full_name = 'shortmess',
      list = 'flags',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('list of flags, reduce length of messages'),
      tags = { 'E1336' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_shm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sbr',
      cb = 'did_set_showbreak',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped.  Useful
        values are "> " or "+++ ": >vim
        	let &showbreak = "> "
        	let &showbreak = '+++ '
        <	Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
        comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
        part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
        The |hl-NonText| highlight group determines the highlighting.
        Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
        If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
        "n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
        A window-local value overrules a global value.  If the global value is
        set and you want no value in the current window use NONE: >vim
        	setlocal showbreak=NONE
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'showbreak',
      redraw = { 'all_windows' },
      scope = { 'global', 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('string to use at the start of wrapped lines'),
      tags = { 'E595' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sbr',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sc',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen.  Set this
        option off if your terminal is slow.
        In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
        - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
          If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6"
          means two characters and six bytes.
        - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
        - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters:
          {lines}x{columns}.
        This information can be displayed in an alternative location using the
        'showcmdloc' option, useful when 'cmdheight' is 0.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'showcmd',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('show (partial) command in status line'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_sc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sloc',
      cb = 'did_set_showcmdloc',
      defaults = 'last',
      values = { 'last', 'statusline', 'tabline' },
      desc = [=[
        This option can be used to display the (partially) entered command in
        another location.  Possible values are:
          last		Last line of the screen (default).
          statusline	Status line of the current window.
          tabline	First line of the screen if 'showtabline' is enabled.
        Setting this option to "statusline" or "tabline" means that these will
        be redrawn whenever the command changes, which can be on every key
        pressed.
        The %S 'statusline' item can be used in 'statusline' or 'tabline' to
        place the text.  Without a custom 'statusline' or 'tabline' it will be
        displayed in a convenient location.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'showcmdloc',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('change location of partial command'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sloc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sft',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
        tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
        pattern (if there is one) as possible matches.  Thus, if you have
        matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
        required (coding style permitting).
        Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in
        'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not
        match the typed text.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'showfulltag',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('show full tag pattern when completing tag'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_sft',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sm',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one.  The
        jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen.  The time to
        show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
        A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
        seen or not).
        When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
        will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
        See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
        blinking when showing the match.
        The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
        matches for.  'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
        matches.
        Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving
        around |pi_paren.txt|.
        Note: Use of the short form is rated PG.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'showmatch',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('briefly jump to matching bracket if insert one'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_sm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'smd',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
        The |hl-ModeMsg| highlight group determines the highlighting.
        The option has no effect when 'cmdheight' is zero.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'showmode',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('message on status line to show current mode'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_smd',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'stal',
      cb = 'did_set_showtabline',
      defaults = 1,
      desc = [=[
        The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels
        will be displayed:
        	0: never
        	1: only if there are at least two tab pages
        	2: always
        This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages
        line.
        See |tab-page| for more information about tab pages.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'showtabline',
      redraw = { 'all_windows', 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('tells when the tab pages line is displayed'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_stal',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ss',
      defaults = 1,
      desc = [=[
        The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally.  Used only when
        the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
        When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
        When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0.  Not used
        for "zh" and "zl" commands.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'sidescroll',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('minimum number of columns to scroll horizontal'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_ss',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'siso',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
        right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set.  Setting this option to a
        value greater than 0 while having 'sidescroll' also at a non-zero
        value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
        horizontally (except at beginning of the line).  Setting this option
        to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor
        horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too
        close to the beginning of the line.
        After using the local value, go back the global value with one of
        these two: >vim
        	setlocal sidescrolloff<
        	setlocal sidescrolloff=-1
        <
        Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as in the
        	 following example to never allow the cursor to move onto the
        	 "extends" character: >vim

        	 set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
        	 set sidescrolloff=1
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'sidescrolloff',
      scope = { 'global', 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('min. nr. of columns to left and right of cursor'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_siso',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'scl',
      cb = 'did_set_signcolumn',
      defaults = 'auto',
      values = {
        'yes',
        'no',
        'auto',
        'auto:1',
        'auto:2',
        'auto:3',
        'auto:4',
        'auto:5',
        'auto:6',
        'auto:7',
        'auto:8',
        'auto:9',
        'yes:1',
        'yes:2',
        'yes:3',
        'yes:4',
        'yes:5',
        'yes:6',
        'yes:7',
        'yes:8',
        'yes:9',
        'number',
      },
      desc = [=[
        When and how to draw the signcolumn.  Valid values are:
           "auto"	only when there is a sign to display
           "auto:[1-9]" resize to accommodate multiple signs up to the
        		given number (maximum 9), e.g. "auto:4"
           "auto:[1-8]-[2-9]"
        		resize to accommodate multiple signs up to the
        		given maximum number (maximum 9) while keeping
        		at least the given minimum (maximum 8) fixed
        		space. The minimum number should always be less
        		than the maximum number, e.g. "auto:2-5"
           "no"		never
           "yes"	always
           "yes:[1-9]"  always, with fixed space for signs up to the given
        		number (maximum 9), e.g. "yes:3"
           "number"	display signs in the 'number' column.  If the number
        		column is not present, then behaves like "auto".
      ]=],
      full_name = 'signcolumn',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('when to display the sign column'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'scs',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
        case characters.  Only used when the search pattern is typed and
        'ignorecase' option is on.  Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
        ":g" and ":s" and when filtering matches for the completion menu
        |compl-states|.
        Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.  After "*" and "#" you
        can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command, recalling the search
        pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'smartcase',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('no ignore case when pattern has uppercase'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_scs',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'si',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line.  Works for C-like
        programs, but can also be used for other languages.  'cindent' does
        something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
        see |C-indenting|.  When 'cindent' is on or 'indentexpr' is set,
        setting 'si' has no effect.  'indentexpr' is a more advanced
        alternative.
        Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
        An indent is automatically inserted:
        - After a line ending in "{".
        - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
        - Before a line starting with "}" (only with the "O" command).
        When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
        given the same indent as the matching "{".
        When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
        that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column.  The indent
        is restored for the next line.  If you don't want this, use this
        mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
        When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
        right.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'smartindent',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('smart autoindenting for C programs'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_si',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sta',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When enabled, the <Tab> key will indent by 'shiftwidth' if the cursor
        is in leading whitespace.  The <BS> key has the opposite effect.
        In leading whitespace, this has the same effect as setting
        'softtabstop' to the value of 'shiftwidth'.
        NOTE: in most cases, using 'softtabstop' is a better option.  Have a
        look at section |30.5| of the user guide for detailed
        explanations on how Vim works with tabs and spaces.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'smarttab',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("use 'shiftwidth' when inserting <Tab>"),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_sta',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sms',
      cb = 'did_set_smoothscroll',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Scrolling works with screen lines.  When 'wrap' is set and the first
        line in the window wraps part of it may not be visible, as if it is
        above the window.  "<<<" is displayed at the start of the first line,
        highlighted with |hl-NonText|.
        You may also want to add "lastline" to the 'display' option to show as
        much of the last line as possible.
        NOTE: partly implemented, doesn't work yet for |gj| and |gk|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'smoothscroll',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_("scroll by screen lines when 'wrap' is set"),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sts',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Create soft tab stops, separated by 'softtabstop' number of columns.
        In Insert mode, pressing the <Tab> key will move the cursor to the
        next soft tab stop, instead of inserting a literal tab.  <BS> behaves
        similarly in reverse.  Vim inserts a minimal mix of tab and space
        characters to produce the visual effect.

        This setting does not affect the display of existing tab characters.

        A value of 0 disables this behaviour.  A negative value makes Vim use
        'shiftwidth'.  If you plan to use 'sts' and 'shiftwidth' with
        different values, you might consider setting 'smarttab'.

        The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' alters tab behavior when 'list' is
        enabled.  See also |ins-expandtab| and user manual section |30.5| for
        in-depth explanations.

        The value of 'softtabstop' will be ignored if 'varsofttabstop' is set
        to anything other than an empty string.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'softtabstop',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('number of spaces that <Tab> uses while editing'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_sts',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_spell',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on spell checking will be done.  See |spell|.
        The languages are specified with 'spelllang'.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'spell',
      redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('spell checking'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'spc',
      cb = 'did_set_spellcapcheck',
      defaults = '[.?!]\\_[\\])\'"\\t ]\\+',
      desc = [=[
        Pattern to locate the end of a sentence.  The following word will be
        checked to start with a capital letter.  If not then it is highlighted
        with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled).
        When this check is not wanted make this option empty.
        Only used when 'spell' is set.
        Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about
        including spaces and backslashes.
        To set this option automatically depending on the language, see
        |set-spc-auto|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'spellcapcheck',
      redraw = { 'current_buffer', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('pattern to locate end of a sentence'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_spc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'spf',
      cb = 'did_set_spellfile',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw|
        commands.  It must end in ".{encoding}.add".  You need to include the
        path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory.
        The path may include characters from 'isfname', ' ', ',', '@' and ':'.
        							*E765*
        It may also be a comma-separated list of names.  A count before the
        |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each.  This allows using
        a personal word list file and a project word list file.
        When a word is added while this option is empty Nvim will use
        (and auto-create) `stdpath('data')/site/spell/`. For the file name the
        first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used, ignoring the
        region.
        The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not
        have to appear in 'spelllang'.
        Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region
        name if you want to.  However, it will then only be used when
        'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files
        without region name will be found.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'spellfile',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('files where |zg| and |zw| store words'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_spf',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'spl',
      cb = 'did_set_spelllang',
      defaults = 'en',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A comma-separated list of word list names.  When the 'spell' option is
        on spellchecking will be done for these languages.  Example: >vim
        	set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical
        <	This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized.  Words
        that are not recognized will be highlighted.
        The word list name must consist of alphanumeric characters, a dash or
        an underscore.  It should not include a comma or dot.  Using a dash is
        recommended to separate the two letter language name from a
        specification.  Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words.
        A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is
        the two-letter, lower case region name.  You can use more than one
        region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian
        English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great
        Britain.  (Note: currently en_au and en_nz dictionaries are older than
        en_ca, en_gb and en_us).
        If the name "cjk" is included East Asian characters are excluded from
        spell checking.  This is useful when editing text that also has Asian
        words.
        Note that the "medical" dictionary does not exist, it is just an
        example of a longer name.
        						*E757*
        As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is.  The
        first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name
        (_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter).
        This is mainly for testing purposes.  You must make sure the correct
        encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it.
        How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|.

        If the |package-spellfile| plugin is active and you use a language name
        for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin
        will ask you if you want to download the file.

        After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files
        "spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'.  "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang'
        up to the first character that is not an ASCII letter or number and
        not a dash.  Also see |set-spc-auto|.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'spelllang',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'current_buffer', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('language(s) to do spell checking for'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_spl',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'spo',
      cb = 'did_set_spelloptions',
      defaults = '',
      values = { 'camel', 'noplainbuffer' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A comma-separated list of options for spell checking:
        camel		When a word is CamelCased, assume "Cased" is a
        		separate word: every upper-case character in a word
        		that comes after a lower case character indicates the
        		start of a new word.
        noplainbuffer	Only spellcheck a buffer when 'syntax' is enabled,
        		or when extmarks are set within the buffer. Only
        		designated regions of the buffer are spellchecked in
        		this case.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'spelloptions',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'current_buffer', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_spo',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sps',
      cb = 'did_set_spellsuggest',
      defaults = 'best',
      -- Keep this in sync with spell_check_sps().
      values = { 'best', 'fast', 'double', 'expr:', 'file:', 'timeout:' },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Methods used for spelling suggestions.  Both for the |z=| command and
        the |spellsuggest()| function.  This is a comma-separated list of
        items:

        best		Internal method that works best for English.  Finds
        		changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like
        		scoring to improve the ordering.

        double		Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the
        		results.  The first method is "fast", the other method
        		computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad
        		word.  That only works when the language specifies
        		sound folding.  Can be slow and doesn't always give
        		better results.

        fast		Internal method that only checks for simple changes:
        		character inserts/deletes/swaps.  Works well for
        		simple typing mistakes.

        {number}	The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|.
        		Not used for |spellsuggest()|.  The number of
        		suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines'
        		minus two.

        timeout:{millisec}   Limit the time searching for suggestions to
        		{millisec} milliseconds.  Applies to the following
        		methods.  When omitted the limit is 5000.  When
        		negative there is no limit.

        file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns,
        		separated by a slash.  The first column contains the
        		bad word, the second column the suggested good word.
        		Example:
        			theribal/terrible ~
        		Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the
        		top of the suggestion list with the internal methods.
        		Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for
        		comments.
        		The word in the second column must be correct,
        		otherwise it will not be used.  Add the word to an
        		".add" file if it is currently flagged as a spelling
        		mistake.
        		The file is used for all languages.

        expr:{expr}	Evaluate expression {expr}.  Use a function to avoid
        		trouble with spaces.  Best is to call a function
        		without arguments, see |expr-option-function|.
        		|v:val| holds the badly spelled word.  The expression
        		must evaluate to a List of Lists, each with a
        		suggestion and a score.
        		Example:
        			[['the', 33], ['that', 44]] ~
        		Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the
        		internal methods use.  A lower score is better.
        		This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily
        		set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part.
        		Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the
        		'verbose' option to a non-zero value.

        Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used.  The others may
        appear several times in any order.  Example: >vim
        	set sps=file:~/.config/nvim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest()
        <	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'spellsuggest',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('method(s) used to suggest spelling corrections'),
      tags = { 'E5700' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sps',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sb',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
        one. |:split|
      ]=],
      full_name = 'splitbelow',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('new window from split is below the current one'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_sb',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'spk',
      defaults = 'cursor',
      values = { 'cursor', 'screen', 'topline' },
      desc = [=[
        The value of this option determines the scroll behavior when opening,
        closing or resizing horizontal splits.

        Possible values are:
          cursor	Keep the same relative cursor position.
          screen	Keep the text on the same screen line.
          topline	Keep the topline the same.

        For the "screen" and "topline" values, the cursor position will be
        changed when necessary.  In this case, the jumplist will be populated
        with the previous cursor position.  For "screen", the text cannot
        always be kept on the same screen line when 'wrap' is enabled.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'splitkeep',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('determines scroll behavior for split windows'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_spk',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'spr',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
        current one. |:vsplit|
      ]=],
      full_name = 'splitright',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('new window is put right of the current one'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_spr',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sol',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
        non-blank of the line.  When off the cursor is kept in the same column
        (if possible).  This applies to the commands:
        - CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B, CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", "gg"
        - "d", "<<", "==" and ">>" with a linewise operator
          (|operator-resulting-pos|)
        - "%" with a count
        - buffer changing commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.)
        - Ex commands that only have a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
        In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
        where it was the last time the buffer was edited.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'startofline',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('commands move cursor to first non-blank in line'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_sol',
      vim = false,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'stc',
      cb = 'did_set_statuscolumn',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When non-empty, this option determines the content of the area to the
        side of a window, normally containing the fold, sign and number columns.
        The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.

        Some of the items from the 'statusline' format are different for
        'statuscolumn':

        %l	line number column for currently drawn line
        %s	sign column for currently drawn line
        %C	fold column for currently drawn line

        The 'statuscolumn' width follows that of the default columns and
        adapts to the 'numberwidth', 'signcolumn' and 'foldcolumn' option values
        (regardless of whether the sign and fold items are present).
        Additionally, the 'statuscolumn' grows with the size of the evaluated
        format string, up to a point (following the maximum size of the default
        fold, sign and number columns). Shrinking only happens when the number
        of lines in a buffer changes, or the 'statuscolumn' option is set.

        The |v:lnum|    variable holds the line number to be drawn.
        The |v:relnum|  variable holds the relative line number to be drawn.
        The |v:virtnum| variable is negative when drawing virtual lines, zero
        	      when drawing the actual buffer line, and positive when
        	      drawing the wrapped part of a buffer line.

        When using |v:relnum|, keep in mind that cursor movement by itself will
        not cause the 'statuscolumn' to update unless 'relativenumber' is set.

        NOTE: The %@ click execute function item is supported as well but the
        specified function will be the same for each row in the same column.
        It cannot be switched out through a dynamic 'statuscolumn' format, the
        handler should be written with this in mind.

        Examples: >vim
        	" Line number with bar separator and click handlers:
        	set statuscolumn=%@SignCb@%s%=%T%@NumCb@%l│%T

        	" Line numbers in hexadecimal for non wrapped part of lines:
        	let &stc='%=%{v:virtnum>0?"":printf("%x",v:lnum)} '

        	" Human readable line numbers with thousands separator:
        	let &stc='%{substitute(v:lnum,"\\d\\zs\\ze\\'
        		   . '%(\\d\\d\\d\\)\\+$",",","g")}'

        	" Both relative and absolute line numbers with different
        	" highlighting for odd and even relative numbers:
        	let &stc='%#NonText#%{&nu?v:lnum:""}' .
        	 '%=%{&rnu&&(v:lnum%2)?"\ ".v:relnum:""}' .
        	 '%#LineNr#%{&rnu&&!(v:lnum%2)?"\ ".v:relnum:""}'

        <	WARNING: this expression is evaluated for each screen line so defining
        an expensive expression can negatively affect render performance.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'statuscolumn',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('custom format for the status column'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'stl',
      cb = 'did_set_statusline',
      defaults = {
        if_true = table.concat({
          '%<',
          '%f %h%w%m%r ',
          "%{% v:lua.require('vim._core.util').term_exitcode() %}",
          '%=',
          "%{% luaeval('(package.loaded[''vim.ui''] and vim.api.nvim_get_current_win() == tonumber(vim.g.actual_curwin or -1) and vim.ui.progress_status()) or '''' ')%}",
          "%{% &showcmdloc == 'statusline' ? '%-10.S ' : '' %}",
          "%{% exists('b:keymap_name') ? '<'..b:keymap_name..'> ' : '' %}",
          "%{% &busy > 0 ? '◐ ' : '' %}",
          "%{% luaeval('(package.loaded[''vim.diagnostic''] and next(vim.diagnostic.count()) and vim.diagnostic.status() .. '' '') or '''' ') %}",
          "%{% &ruler ? ( &rulerformat == '' ? '%-14.(%l,%c%V%) %P' : &rulerformat ) : '' %}",
        }),
        doc = 'is very long',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Sets the |status-line|.

        Contains printf-style "%" items interspersed with normal text, where
        each item has the form: >
          %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
        <
        All fields except {item} are optional.  Use "%%" to show a literal "%"
        char.  Setting to empty (`:set statusline=`) sets the global value to
        the default.

        						*stl-%!*
        When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression,
        evaluated and the result is used as the option value.  Example: >vim
        	set statusline=%!MyStatusLine()
        <	The *g:statusline_winid* variable will be set to the |window-ID| of the
        window that the status line belongs to.
        The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too.
        Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the
        current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the
        context of the window that the statusline belongs to.

        When there is an error while evaluating the option it will be reset to
        its default value to avoid further errors.  Otherwise screen updating
        would loop.  When the result contains unprintable characters the
        result is unpredictable.

        Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
        'laststatus' is 2 or 3) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.

        field	    meaning ~
        -	    Left justify the item.  The default is right justified
        	    when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
        0	    Leading zeroes in numeric items.  Overridden by "-".
        minwid	    Minimum width of the item, padding as set by "-" & "0".
        	    Value must be 50 or less.
        maxwid	    Maximum width of the item.  Truncation occurs with a "<"
        	    on the left for text items.  Numeric items will be
        	    shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by ">"number
        	    where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
        	    an exponential notation.
        item	    A one letter code as described below.

        Following is a description of the possible statusline items.  The
        second character in "item" is the type:
        	N for number
        	S for string
        	F for flags as described below
        	- not applicable

        item  meaning ~
        f S   Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current
              directory.
        F S   Full path to the file in the buffer.
        t S   File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
        m F   Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
        M F   Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
        r F   Readonly flag, text is "[RO]".
        R F   Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
        h F   Help buffer flag, text is "[help]".
        H F   Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
        w F   Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]".
        W F   Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
        y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]".  See 'filetype'.
        Y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM".  See 'filetype'.
        q S   "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty.
        k S   Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
              being used: "<keymap>"
        n N   Buffer number.
        b N   Value of character under cursor.
        B N   As above, in hexadecimal.
        o N   Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
              Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
        O N   As above, in hexadecimal.
        l N   Line number.
        L N   Number of lines in buffer.
        c N   Column number (byte index).
        v N   Virtual column number (screen column).
        V N   Virtual column number as -{num}.  Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
        p N   Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
        P S   Percentage through file of displayed window.  This is like the
              percentage described for 'ruler'.  Always 3 in length, unless
              translated.
        S S   'showcmd' content, see 'showcmdloc'.
        a S   Argument list status as in default title.  ({current} of {max})
              Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
        { NF  Evaluate expression between "%{" and "}" and substitute result.
              Note that there is no "%" before the closing "}".  The
              expression cannot contain a "}" character, call a function to
              work around that.  See |stl-%{| below.
        `{%` -  This is almost same as "{" except the result of the expression is
              re-evaluated as a statusline format string.  Thus if the
              return value of expr contains "%" items they will get expanded.
              The expression can contain the "}" character, the end of
              expression is denoted by "%}".
              For example: >vim
        	func! Stl_filename() abort
        	    return "%t"
        	endfunc
        <	        `stl=%{Stl_filename()}`   results in `"%t"`
                `stl=%{%Stl_filename()%}` results in `"Name of current file"`
        %} -  End of "{%" expression
        ( -   Start of item group.  Can be used for setting the width and
              alignment of a section.  Must be followed by %) somewhere.
        ) -   End of item group.  No width fields allowed.
        T N   For 'tabline': start of tab page N label.  Use %T or %X to end
              the label.  Clicking this label with left mouse button switches
              to the specified tab page, while clicking it with middle mouse
              button closes the specified tab page.
        X N   For 'tabline': start of close tab N label.  Use %X or %T to end
              the label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X.  Use %999X for a "close current
              tab" label.  Clicking this label with left mouse button closes
              the specified tab page.
        @ N   Start of execute function label. Use %X or %T to end the label,
              e.g.: %10@SwitchBuffer@foo.c%X.  Clicking this label runs the
              specified function: in the example when clicking once using left
              mouse button on "foo.c", a `SwitchBuffer(10, 1, 'l', '    ')`
              expression will be run.  The specified function receives the
              following arguments in order:
              1. minwid field value or zero if no N was specified
              2. number of mouse clicks to detect multiple clicks
              3. mouse button used: "l", "r" or "m" for left, right or middle
                 button respectively; one should not rely on third argument
                 being only "l", "r" or "m": any other non-empty string value
                 that contains only ASCII lower case letters may be expected
                 for other mouse buttons
              4. modifiers pressed: string which contains "s" if shift
                 modifier was pressed, "c" for control, "a" for alt and "m"
                 for meta; currently if modifier is not pressed string
                 contains space instead, but one should not rely on presence
                 of spaces or specific order of modifiers: use |stridx()| to
                 test whether some modifier is present; string is guaranteed
                 to contain only ASCII letters and spaces, one letter per
                 modifier; "?" modifier may also be present, but its presence
                 is a bug that denotes that new mouse button recognition was
                 added without modifying code that reacts on mouse clicks on
                 this label.
              Use |getmousepos()|.winid in the specified function to get the
              corresponding window id of the clicked item.
        \< -   Where to truncate line if too long.  Default is at the start.
              No width fields allowed.
        = -   Separation point between alignment sections.  Each section will
              be separated by an equal number of spaces.  With one %= what
              comes after it will be right-aligned.  With two %= there is a
              middle part, with white space left and right of it.
              No width fields allowed.
        # -   Set highlight group.  The name must follow and then a # again.
              Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname.  The same
              highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current
              windows.
        $ -   Same as `#`, except the `%$HLname$` group will inherit from
              preceding highlight attributes.
        * -   Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
              minwid field, e.g. %1*.  Restore normal highlight with %* or
              %0*.  The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be
              applied to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current
              windows.
              The number N must be between 1 and 9.  See |hl-User1..9|

        When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when
        that flag comes right after plaintext.  This will make a nice display
        when flags are used like in the examples below.

        When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are
        not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
        become empty.  This will make a group like the following disappear
        completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >vim
        	set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
        <	Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
        line is displayed.
        			*stl-%{* *g:actual_curbuf* *g:actual_curwin*
        While evaluating %{} the current buffer and current window will be set
        temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
        currently being drawn.  The expression will evaluate in this context.
        The variable "g:actual_curbuf" is set to the `bufnr()` number of the
        real current buffer and "g:actual_curwin" to the |window-ID| of the
        real current window.  These values are strings.

        The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from
        a modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|.

        If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
        a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
        using `:redrawstatus`.

        A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
        Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
        described above.

        Watch out for errors in expressions.  They may render Vim unusable!
        If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
        edit your vimrc or whatever with "vim --clean" to get it right.

        Examples:
        Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >vim
          set statusline=%<%f\ %h%w%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
        <	Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >vim
          set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
        <	Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >vim
          set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
          hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
        <	Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >vim
          set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
        <	In the |:autocmd|'s: >vim
          let b:gzflag = 1
        <	And: >vim
          unlet b:gzflag
        <	And define this function: >vim
          function VarExists(var, val)
              if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
          endfunction
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'statusline',
      modelineexpr = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'global', 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('custom format for the status line'),
      tags = { 'E540', 'E542' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_stl',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'su',
      defaults = '.bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
        match a wildcard.  See |suffixes|.  Commas can be used to separate the
        suffixes.  Spaces after the comma are ignored.  A dot is also seen as
        the start of a suffix.  To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
        separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
        including spaces and backslashes).
        See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        suffixes from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'suffixes',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('suffixes that are ignored with multiple match'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_su',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'sua',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Comma-separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
        file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands.  Example: >vim
        	set suffixesadd=.java
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'suffixesadd',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('suffixes added when searching for a file'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_sua',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'swf',
      cb = 'did_set_swapfile',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        Use a swapfile for the buffer.  This option can be reset when a
        swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer.  For example, with
        confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
        Careful: All text will be in memory:
        	- Don't use this for big files.
        	- Recovery will be impossible!
        A swapfile will only be present when 'updatecount' is non-zero and
        'swapfile' is set.
        When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
        immediately deleted.  When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
        non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
        Also see |swap-file|.
        If you want to open a new buffer without creating a swap file for it,
        use the |:noswapfile| modifier.
        See 'directory' for where the swap file is created.

        This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
        specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'swapfile',
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('whether to use a swapfile for a buffer'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_swf',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'swb',
      defaults = 'uselast',
      values = { 'useopen', 'usetab', 'split', 'newtab', 'vsplit', 'uselast' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
        This option is checked, when
        - jumping to errors with the |quickfix| commands (|:cc|, |:cn|, |:cp|,
          etc.).
        - jumping to a tag using the |:stag| command.
        - opening a file using the |CTRL-W_f| or |CTRL-W_F| command.
        - jumping to a buffer using a buffer split command (e.g.  |:sbuffer|,
          |:sbnext|, or |:sbrewind|).
        Possible values (comma-separated list):
           useopen	If included, jump to the first open window in the
        		current tab page that contains the specified buffer
        		(if there is one).  Otherwise: Do not examine other
        		windows.
           usetab	Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab
        		pages.
           split	If included, split the current window before loading
        		a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors.
        		Otherwise: do not split, use current window (when used
        		in the quickfix window: the previously used window or
        		split if there is no other window).
           vsplit	Just like "split" but split vertically.
           newtab	Like "split", but open a new tab page.  Overrules
        		"split" when both are present.
           uselast	If included, jump to the previously used window when
        		jumping to errors with |quickfix| commands.
        If a window has 'winfixbuf' enabled, 'switchbuf' is currently not
        applied to the split window.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'switchbuf',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('sets behavior when switching to another buffer'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_swb',
      flags_varname = 'swb_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'smc',
      defaults = 3000,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum column in which to search for syntax items.  In long lines the
        text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not
        be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared.
        This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one
        long line.
        Set to zero to remove the limit.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'synmaxcol',
      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum column to find syntax items'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_smc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'syn',
      cb = 'did_set_filetype_or_syntax',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
        syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
        Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
        b:current_syntax variable does).
        This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
        not automatically recognized.  Example, in an IDL file: >c
        	/* vim: set syntax=idl : */
        <	When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
        names.  Example: >c
        	/* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */
        <	This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax.
        Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition,
        otherwise it will be skipped.  More than one dot may appear.
        To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >vim
        	set syntax=OFF
        <	To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
        'filetype' option: >vim
        	set syntax=ON
        <	What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
        Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
        This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
        'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
        Only alphanumeric characters, '.', '-' and '_' can be used.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'syntax',
      noglob = true,
      normal_fname_chars = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('syntax to be loaded for current buffer'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_syn',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tcl',
      defaults = '',
      values = { 'left', 'uselast' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        This option controls the behavior when closing tab pages (e.g., using
        |:tabclose|).  When empty Vim goes to the next (right) tab page.

        Possible values (comma-separated list):
           left		If included, go to the previous tab page instead of
        		the next one.
           uselast	If included, go to the previously used tab page if
        		possible.  This option takes precedence over the
        		others.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'tabclose',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('which tab page to focus when closing a tab'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_tcl',
      flags_varname = 'tcl_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tal',
      cb = 'did_set_tabline',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When non-empty, this option determines the content of the tab pages
        line at the top of the Vim window.  When empty Vim will use a default
        tab pages line.  See |setting-tabline| for more info.

        The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline'
        option and only when there is no GUI tab line.  When 'e' is in
        'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used
        instead.  Note that the two tab pages lines are very different.

        The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'.  You can use
        |tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out
        the text to be displayed.  Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for
        the second one, etc.  Use "%X" items for closing labels.

        When changing something that is used in 'tabline' that does not
        trigger it to be updated, use |:redrawtabline|.
        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.

        Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others
        are invisible and you can't jump to their windows.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'tabline',
      modelineexpr = true,
      redraw = { 'tabline' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('custom format for the console tab pages line'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_tal',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tpm',
      defaults = 50,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line
        argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage|
      ]=],
      full_name = 'tabpagemax',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum number of tab pages for |-p| and "tab all"'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_tpm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ts',
      cb = 'did_set_shiftwidth_tabstop',
      defaults = 8,
      desc = [=[
        Defines the column multiple used to display the Horizontal Tab
        character (ASCII 9); a Horizontal Tab always advances to the next tab
        stop.
        The value must be at least 1 and at most 9999.
        If 'vartabstop' is set, this option is ignored.
        Leave it at 8 unless you have a strong reason (see usr |30.5|).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'tabstop',
      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('number of spaces that <Tab> in file uses'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_ts',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tbs',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
        use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file.  Binary
        searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
        will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
        Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
        they are not sorted.  Only when this is not the case does the
        'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.

        When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
        files.  In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
        certain files, or retry all files with a linear search.  When
        'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.

        Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
        at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
           !_TAG_FILE_SORTED	0	/some comment/
        <	[The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]

        When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
        files listed in 'tags', and case is ignored or a pattern is used
        instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
        Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
        be found in the retry.

        If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second,
        linear search can be avoided when case is ignored.  Use a value of '2'
        in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this.  A tag file can be case-fold
        sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in the command:
        "sort -f -o tags tags".  For Universal ctags and Exuberant ctags
        version 5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be
        used for this as well.  Note that case must be folded to uppercase for
        this to work.

        By default, tag searches are case-sensitive.  Case is ignored when
        'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is
        "ignore".
        Also when 'tagcase' is "followscs" and 'smartcase' is set, or
        'tagcase' is "smart", and the pattern contains only lowercase
        characters.

        When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
        exists, but faster when no full match exists.  Tags in unsorted tags
        files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
        When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
        ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
        must be included in the tags file.
        This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
        command-line completion and ":help").
      ]=],
      full_name = 'tagbsearch',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('use binary searching in tags files'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_tbs',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tc',
      cb = 'did_set_tagcase',
      defaults = 'followic',
      values = { 'followic', 'ignore', 'match', 'followscs', 'smart' },
      flags = true,
      desc = [=[
        This option specifies how case is handled when searching the tags
        file:
           followic	Follow the 'ignorecase' option
           followscs    Follow the 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options
           ignore	Ignore case
           match	Match case
           smart	Ignore case unless an upper case letter is used
      ]=],
      full_name = 'tagcase',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('how to handle case when searching in tags files'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_tc',
      flags_varname = 'tc_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tfu',
      cb = 'did_set_tagfunc',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        This option specifies a function to be used to perform tag searches
        (including |taglist()|).
        The function gets the tag pattern and should return a List of matching
        tags.  See |tag-function| for an explanation of how to write the
        function and an example.  The value can be the name of a function, a
        |lambda| or a |Funcref|.  See |option-value-function| for more
        information.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'tagfunc',
      func = true,
      scope = { 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('function used to perform tag searches'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_tfu',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tl',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'taglength',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('number of significant characters for a tag'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_tl',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tr',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that
        tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'tagrelative',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('file names in tag file are relative'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_tr',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tag',
      defaults = './tags;,tags',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas.  To
        include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with backslashes
        (see |option-backslash| about including spaces/commas and backslashes).
        When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
        of the current file.  But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
        'cpoptions'.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  Also see
        |tags-option|.
        "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
        a directory tree.  See |file-searching|.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will
        find all files named "tags" below "/lib".  The filename itself cannot
        contain wildcards, it is used as-is.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find
        files called "tags?".
        The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names
        actually used.
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        file names from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'tags',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('list of file names used by the tag command'),
      tags = { 'E433' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_tags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tgst',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When on, the |tagstack| is used normally.  When off, a ":tag" or
        ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
        tagstack.  A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
        any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
        tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
        Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
        mapping which should not change the tagstack.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'tagstack',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('push tags onto the tag stack'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_tgst',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tbidi',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
        by Unicode).  The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
        that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
        Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
        'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
        Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
        'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
        For further details see |l10n-arabic.txt|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'termbidi',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('terminal takes care of bi-directionality'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_tbidi',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tenc',
      defaults = '',
      full_name = 'termencoding',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Terminal encoding'),
      type = 'string',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tgc',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Enables 24-bit RGB color in the |TUI|.  Uses "gui" |:highlight|
        attributes instead of "cterm" attributes. |guifg|
        Requires an ISO-8613-3 compatible terminal.

        Nvim will automatically attempt to determine if the host terminal
        supports 24-bit color and will enable this option if it does
        (unless explicitly disabled by the user).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'termguicolors',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Terminal true color support'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_tgc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tpf',
      defaults = 'BS,HT,ESC,DEL',
      values = { 'BS', 'HT', 'FF', 'ESC', 'DEL', 'C0', 'C1' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A comma-separated list of options for specifying control characters
        to be removed from the text pasted into the terminal window. The
        supported values are:

           BS	    Backspace

           HT	    TAB

           FF	    Form feed

           ESC	    Escape

           DEL	    DEL

           C0	    Other control characters, excluding Line feed and
        	    Carriage return < ' '

           C1	    Control characters 0x80...0x9F
      ]=],
      full_name = 'termpastefilter',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_tpf',
      flags_varname = 'tpf_flags',
    },
    {
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        If the host terminal supports it, buffer all screen updates
        made during a redraw cycle so that each screen is displayed in
        the terminal all at once. This can prevent tearing or flickering
        when the terminal updates faster than Nvim can redraw.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'termsync',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('synchronize redraw output with the host terminal'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_termsync',
    },
    {
      defaults = false,
      full_name = 'terse',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tw',
      cb = 'did_set_textwidth',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum width of text that is being inserted.  A longer line will be
        broken after white space to get this width.  A zero value disables
        this.
        When 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used.  See also
        'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
        When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'textwidth',
      redraw = { 'current_buffer', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum width of text that is being inserted'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_tw',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tsr',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
        for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.  See
        |compl-thesaurus|.

        This option is not used if 'thesaurusfunc' is set, either for the
        buffer or globally.

        To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
        after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
        name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.  The use of
        |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing directories
        from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version uses
        another default.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'thesaurus',
      list = 'onecomma',
      normal_dname_chars = true,
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('list of thesaurus files for keyword completion'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_tsr',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tsrfu',
      cb = 'did_set_thesaurusfunc',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        This option specifies a function to be used for thesaurus completion
        with CTRL-X CTRL-T.  |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T| See |compl-thesaurusfunc|.
        The value can be the name of a function, a |lambda| or a |Funcref|.
        See |option-value-function| for more information.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'thesaurusfunc',
      func = true,
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('function used for thesaurus completion'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_tsrfu',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'top',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'tildeop',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('tilde command "~" behaves like an operator'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_to',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'to',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        This option and 'timeoutlen' determine the behavior when part of a
        mapped key sequence has been received. For example, if <c-f> is
        pressed and 'timeout' is set, Nvim will wait 'timeoutlen' milliseconds
        for any key that can follow <c-f> in a mapping.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'timeout',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('time out on mappings and key codes'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_timeout',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tm',
      defaults = 1000,
      desc = [=[
        Time in milliseconds to wait for a mapped sequence to complete.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'timeoutlen',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('time out time in milliseconds'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_tm',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_title_icon',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        If enabled, Nvim will update the (GUI or terminal) window title. The
        format is configured by 'titlestring'. By default it looks like: >
        	filename [+=-] (path) - Nvim
        <
        where: >
        	filename	the name of the file being edited
        	-		indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off
        	+		indicates the file was modified
        	=		indicates the file is read-only
        	=+		indicates the file is read-only and modified
        	(path)		is the path of the file being edited
        	- Nvim		the server name |v:servername| or "Nvim"
        <
      ]=],
      full_name = 'title',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('set the title of the window'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_title',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_titlelen',
      defaults = 85,
      desc = [=[
        Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
        title.  When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
        shown.  A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
        Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window.  But
        it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
        available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
        bar.  When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used.  Otherwise,
        values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
        'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'titlelen',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("of 'columns' used for window title"),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_titlelen',
    },
    {
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        If not empty, this option will be used to set the window title when
        exiting.  Only if 'title' is enabled.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'titleold',
      no_mkrc = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('title, restored when exiting'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_titleold',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_titlestring',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Formats the window title, enabled by the 'title' option.

        Contains printf-style "%" items, expanded according to the rules of
        'statusline'.  If a "%" format is invalid, it is used as-is and no
        error will be given.

        The default (empty) behaviour is equivalent to: >vim
            set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ \(%{expand(\"%:~:h\")}\)%)%a\ -\ Nvim
        <
        Example: >vim
            auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() .. "/" .. expand("%:p")
            set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
        <	The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle
        or right of the available space.

        Example: to have the file name first: >vim
            set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
        <	Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of
        the file, without the file name.  The "%( %)" constructs add a
        separating space only when needed.

        NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
        to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).

        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'titlestring',
      modelineexpr = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('to use for the Vim window title'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_titlestring',
    },
    {
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        This option and 'ttimeoutlen' determine the behavior when part of a
        key code sequence has been received by the |TUI|.

        For example if <Esc> (the \x1b byte) is received and 'ttimeout' is
        set, Nvim waits 'ttimeoutlen' milliseconds for the terminal to
        complete a key code sequence. If no input arrives before the timeout,
        a single <Esc> is assumed. Many TUI cursor key codes start with <Esc>.

        On very slow systems this may fail, causing cursor keys not to work
        sometimes.  If you discover this problem you can ":set ttimeoutlen=9999".
        Nvim will wait for the next character to arrive after an <Esc>.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'ttimeout',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('out on mappings'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ttimeout',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ttm',
      defaults = 50,
      desc = [=[
        Time in milliseconds to wait for a key code sequence to complete. Also
        used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G when part of a command has
        been typed.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'ttimeoutlen',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('time out time for key codes in milliseconds'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_ttm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'tf',
      defaults = true,
      full_name = 'ttyfast',
      no_mkrc = true,
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('Deprecated'),
      type = 'boolean',
      immutable = true,
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'udir',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas.
        See 'backupdir' for details of the format.
        "." means using the directory of the file.  The undo file name for
        "file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~".
        For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited
        file, with path separators replaced with "%".
        When writing: The first directory that exists is used.  "." always
        works, no directories after "." will be used for writing.  If none of
        the directories exist Nvim will attempt to create the last directory in
        the list.
        When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file.  The first
        undo file that exists is used.  When it cannot be read an error is
        given, no further entry is used.
        See |undo-persistence|.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.

        Note that unlike 'directory' and 'backupdir', 'undodir' always acts as
        though the trailing slashes are present (see 'backupdir' for what this
        means).
      ]=],
      expand = 'nodefault',
      full_name = 'undodir',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('where to store undo files'),
      tags = { 'E5003' },
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_udir',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'udf',
      cb = 'did_set_undofile',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when
        writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same
        file on buffer read.
        The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'.
        For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|.
        The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from
        before a reload to be saved for undo.
        When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'undofile',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('save undo information in a file'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_udf',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ul',
      cb = 'did_set_undolevels',
      defaults = 1000,
      desc = [=[
        Maximum number of changes that can be undone.  Since undo information
        is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used.
        Nevertheless, a single change can already use a large amount of
        memory.  Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u"
        undoes itself: >vim
        	set ul=0
        <	But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
        'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
        Also see |undo-two-ways|.
        Set to -1 for no undo at all.  You might want to do this only for the
        current buffer: >vim
        	setlocal ul=-1
        <	This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.

        The local value is set to -123456 when the global value is to be used.

        Also see |clear-undo|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'undolevels',
      scope = { 'global', 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('maximum number of changes that can be undone'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_ul',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ur',
      defaults = 10000,
      desc = [=[
        Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it.  This applies to the
        ":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of
        Vim. |FileChangedShell|
        The save only happens when this option is negative or when the number
        of lines is smaller than the value of this option.
        Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload.

        When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read.

        Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory.  Set
        this option to a lower value if you run out of memory.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'undoreload',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('max nr of lines to save for undo on a buffer reload'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_ur',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'uc',
      cb = 'did_set_updatecount',
      defaults = 200,
      desc = [=[
        After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
        disk.  When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
        recovery |crash-recovery|).  'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
        Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|.  When editing in readonly
        mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
        The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with 'swapfile'.
        When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are
        created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set.  When 'updatecount'
        is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
        This option has no meaning in buffers where 'buftype' is "nofile" or
        "nowrite".
      ]=],
      full_name = 'updatecount',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('after this many characters flush swap file'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_uc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ut',
      defaults = 4000,
      desc = [=[
        If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
        written to disk (see |crash-recovery|).  Also used for the
        |CursorHold| autocommand event.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'updatetime',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('after this many milliseconds flush swap file'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_ut',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'vsts',
      cb = 'did_set_varsofttabstop',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Defines variable-width soft tab stops.  The value is a comma-separated
        list of widths in columns.  Each width defines the number of columns
        before the next soft tab stop.  The last value repeats indefinitely.

        For example, when editing assembly language files where statements
        start in the 9th column and comments in the 41st, it may be useful
        to use the following: >vim
        	set varsofttabstop=8,32,8
        <	This sets soft tab stops at column 8, then at column 40 (8 + 32), and
        every 8 columns thereafter.

        Note: this setting overrides 'softtabstop'.
        See section |30.5| of the user manual for detailed explanations on how
        Vim works with tabs and spaces.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'varsofttabstop',
      list = 'comma',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('list of numbers of spaces that <Tab> uses while editing'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_vsts',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'vts',
      cb = 'did_set_vartabstop',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Defines variable-width tab stops.  The value is a comma-separated list
        of widths in columns.  Each width defines the number of columns before
        the next tab stop; the last value repeats indefinitely.

        For example: >
        	:set vartabstop=4,8
        <	This places the first tab stop 4 columns from the start of the line
        and each subsequent tab stop 8 columns apart.

        Note: this setting overrides 'tabstop'.
        On UNIX, it is recommended to keep the default tabstop value of 8.
        Consider setting 'varsofttabstop' instead.
        See section |30.5| of the user manual for detailed explanations on how
        Vim works with tabs and spaces.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'vartabstop',
      list = 'comma',
      redraw = { 'current_buffer' },
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('list of numbers of spaces that <Tab> in file uses'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_vts',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'vbs',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Sets the verbosity level.  Also set by |-V| and |:verbose|.

        Tracing of assignments to options, mappings, etc. in Lua scripts is
        enabled at level 1; Lua scripts are not traced when 'verbose' is 0,
        for performance.

        If greater than or equal to a given level, Nvim produces the following
        messages:

        Level   Messages ~
        ----------------------------------------------------------------------
        1	Enables Lua tracing (see above). Does not produce messages.
        2	When a file is ":source"'ed, or |shada| file is read or written.
        3	UI info, terminal capabilities.
        4	Shell commands.
        5	Every searched tags file and include file.
        8	Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
        9	Executed autocommands.
        11	Finding items in a path.
        12	Vimscript function calls.
        13	When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
        14	Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
        15	Ex commands from a script (truncated at 200 characters).
        16	Ex commands.

        If 'verbosefile' is set then the verbose messages are not displayed.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'verbose',
      redraw = { 'ui_option' },
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('give informative messages'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_verbose',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'vfile',
      cb = 'did_set_verbosefile',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name.
        When the file exists messages are appended.
        Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made
        empty.  Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time.
        Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first.
        The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not
        displayed when 'verbosefile' is set.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
      ]=],
      expand = true,
      full_name = 'verbosefile',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('file to write messages in'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_vfile',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'vdir',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
      ]=],
      expand = 'nodefault',
      full_name = 'viewdir',
      scope = { 'global' },
      secure = true,
      short_desc = N_('directory where to store files with :mkview'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_vdir',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'vop',
      cb = 'did_set_str_generic',
      defaults = 'folds,cursor,curdir',
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command.  It is a comma-separated
        list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring something:
           word		save and restore ~
           cursor	cursor position in file and in window
           curdir	local current directory, if set with |:lcd|
           folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
        		fold options
           options	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
        		global values for local options)
           localoptions same as "options"
           slash	|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "/" in filenames.
           unix		|deprecated| Always enabled. Uses "\n" line endings.
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_str_generic',
      full_name = 'viewoptions',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('specifies what to save for :mkview'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_vop',
      flags_varname = 'vop_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 've',
      cb = 'did_set_virtualedit',
      defaults = '',
      values = { 'block', 'insert', 'all', 'onemore', 'none', 'NONE' },
      flags = {
        Block = 5,
        Insert = 6,
        All = 4,
        Onemore = 8,
        None = 16,
        NoneU = 32,
      },
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A comma-separated list of these words:
            block	Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
            insert	Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
            all		Allow virtual editing in all modes.
            onemore	Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line
            none	When used as the local value, do not allow virtual
        		editing even when the global value is set.  When used
        		as the global value, "none" is the same as "".
            NONE	Alternative spelling of "none".

        Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
        no actual character.  This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end
        of the line.  Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
        editing a table.
        "onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just
        after the last character of the line.  This makes some commands more
        consistent.  Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line
        if the line was empty.  But it is far from Vi compatible.  It may also
        break some plugins or Vim scripts.  For example because |l| can move
        the cursor after the last character.  Use with care!
        Using the `$` command will move to the last character in the line, not
        past it.  This may actually move the cursor to the left!
        The `g$` command will move to the end of the screen line.
        It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will
        not get a warning for it.
        When combined with other words, "none" is ignored.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'virtualedit',
      list = 'onecomma',
      redraw = { 'curswant' },
      scope = { 'global', 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('when to use virtual editing'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ve',
      flags_varname = 've_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'vb',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Use visual bell instead of beeping.  Also see 'errorbells'.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'visualbell',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('use visual bell instead of beeping'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_vb',
    },
    {
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
        has been changed.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'warn',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('for shell command when buffer was changed'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_warn',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ww',
      cb = 'did_set_whichwrap',
      defaults = 'b,s',
      desc = [=[
        Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the
        previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
        the line.  Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
        	char   key	  mode	~
        	 b    <BS>	 Normal and Visual
        	 s    <Space>	 Normal and Visual
        	 h    "h"	 Normal and Visual (not recommended)
        	 l    "l"	 Normal and Visual (not recommended)
        	 <    <Left>	 Normal and Visual
        	 >    <Right>	 Normal and Visual
        	 ~    "~"	 Normal
        	 [    <Left>	 Insert and Replace
        	 ]    <Right>	 Insert and Replace
        For example: >vim
        	set ww=<,>,[,]
        <	allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
        When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
        operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character.  This makes "3h"
        different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line.  This
        is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
        "dh".  If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
        ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
        cursor.
        When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a
        line (not an empty line) then it will not move to the next line.  This
        makes "dl", "cl", "yl" etc. work normally.
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_whichwrap',
      full_name = 'whichwrap',
      list = 'flagscomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('allow specified keys to cross line boundaries'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_ww',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wc',
      cb = 'did_set_wildchar',
      defaults = {
        if_true = macros('TAB', 'number'),
        doc = '<Tab>',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
        command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
        More info here: |cmdline-completion|.
        The character is not recognized when used inside a macro.  See
        'wildcharm' for that.
        Some keys will not work, such as CTRL-C, <CR> and Enter.
        <Esc> can be used, but hitting it twice in a row will still exit
        command-line as a failsafe measure.
        Although 'wc' is a number option, it can be specified as a number, a
        single character, a |key-notation| (e.g. <Up>, <C-F>) or a letter
        preceded with a caret (e.g. `^F` is CTRL-F): >vim
        	:set wc=27
        	:set wc=X
        	:set wc=^I
        	set wc=<Tab>
        <	'wildchar' also enables completion in search pattern contexts such as
        |/|, |?|, |:s|, |:g|, |:v|, and |:vim|.  To insert a literal <Tab>
        instead of triggering completion, type <C-V><Tab> or "\t".
        See also 'wildoptions' and |wildtrigger()|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'wildchar',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('command-line character for wildcard expansion'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_wc',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wcm',
      cb = 'did_set_wildchar',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
        recognized when used inside a macro.  You can find "spare"
        command-line keys suitable for this option by looking at
        |ex-edit-index|.  Normally you'll never actually type 'wildcharm',
        just use it in mappings that automatically invoke completion mode,
        e.g.: >vim
        	set wcm=<C-Z>
        	cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
        <	Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'wildcharm',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("like 'wildchar' but also works when mapped"),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_wcm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wig',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A list of file patterns.  A file that matches with one of these
        patterns is ignored when expanding |wildcards|, completing file or
        directory names, and influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and
        |globpath()| unless a flag is passed to disable this.
        The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-pattern|.
        Also see 'suffixes'.
        Example: >vim
        	set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
        <	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        a pattern from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'wildignore',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('files matching these patterns are not completed'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_wig',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wic',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories.
        Has no effect when 'fileignorecase' is set.
        Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which
        happens when there are special characters.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'wildignorecase',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('ignore case when completing file names'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_wic',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wmnu',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
        mode.  On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
        the possible matches are shown.
        When 'wildoptions' contains "pum", then the completion matches are
        shown in a popup menu.  Otherwise they are displayed just above the
        command line, with the first match highlighted (overwriting the status
        line, if there is one).
        Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
        CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
        'wildmode' must specify "full": "longest" and "list" do not start
        'wildmenu' mode. You can check the current mode with |wildmenumode()|.
        The menu is cancelled when a key is hit that is not used for selecting
        a completion.

        While the menu is active these keys have special meanings:
        CTRL-P		- go to the previous entry
        CTRL-N		- go to the next entry
        <Left> <Right>	- select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
        <PageUp>	- select a match several entries back
        <PageDown>	- select a match several entries further
        <Up>		- in filename/menu name completion: move up into
        		  parent directory or parent menu.
        <Down>		- in filename/menu name completion: move into a
        		  subdirectory or submenu.
        <CR>		- in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
        		  dot: move into a submenu.
        CTRL-E		- end completion, go back to what was there before
        		  selecting a match.
        CTRL-Y		- accept the currently selected match and stop
        		  completion.

        If you want <Left> and <Right> to move the cursor instead of selecting
        a different match, use this: >vim
        	cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
        	cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
        <
        |hl-WildMenu| highlights the current match.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'wildmenu',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('use menu for command line completion'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_wmnu',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wim',
      cb = 'did_set_wildmode',
      defaults = 'full',
      -- Keep this in sync with check_opt_wim().
      values = { 'full', 'longest', 'list', 'lastused', 'noselect' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = false,
      desc = [=[
        Completion mode used for the character specified with 'wildchar'.
        This option is a comma-separated list of up to four parts,
        corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth presses of
        'wildchar'.  Each part is a colon-separated list of completion
        behaviors, which are applied simultaneously during that phase.

        The possible behavior values are:
        ""		Only complete (insert) the first match.  No further
        		matches are cycled or listed.
        "full"		Complete the next full match.  Cycles through all
        		matches, returning to the original input after the
        		last match.  If 'wildmenu' is enabled, it will be
        		shown.
        "longest"	Complete to the longest common substring.  If this
        		doesn't extend the input, the next 'wildmode' part is
        		used.
        "list"		If multiple matches are found, list all of them.
        "lastused"	When completing buffer names, sort them by most
        		recently used (excluding the current buffer).  Only
        		applies to buffer name completion.
        "noselect"	If 'wildmenu' is enabled, show the menu but do not
        		preselect the first item.
        If only one match exists, it is completed fully, unless "noselect" is
        specified.

        Some useful combinations of colon-separated values:
        "longest:full"		Start with the longest common string and show
        			'wildmenu' (if enabled).  Does not cycle
        			through full matches.
        "list:full"		List all matches and complete first match.
        "list:longest"		List all matches and complete till the longest
        			common prefix.
        "list:lastused"		List all matches.  When completing buffers,
        			sort them by most recently used (excluding the
        			current buffer).
        "noselect:lastused"	Do not preselect the first item in 'wildmenu'
        			if it is active.  When completing buffers,
        			sort them by most recently used (excluding the
        			current buffer).

        Examples: >vim
        	set wildmode=full
        <	Complete full match on every press (default behavior) >vim
        	set wildmode=longest,full
        <	First press: longest common substring
        Second press: cycle through full matches >vim
        	set wildmode=list:full
        <	First press: list all matches and complete the first one >vim
        	set wildmode=list,full
        <	First press: list matches only
        Second press: complete full matches >vim
        	set wildmode=longest,list
        <	First press: longest common substring
        Second press: list all matches >vim
        	set wildmode=noselect:full
        <	First press: show 'wildmenu' without completing or selecting
        Second press: cycle full matches >vim
        	set wildmode=noselect:lastused,full
        <	Same as above, but buffer matches are sorted by time last used
        More info here: |cmdline-completion|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'wildmode',
      list = 'onecommacolon',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_("mode for 'wildchar' command-line expansion"),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_wim',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wop',
      defaults = 'pum,tagfile',
      values = { 'fuzzy', 'tagfile', 'pum', 'exacttext' },
      flags = true,
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        A list of words that change how |cmdline-completion| is done.
        The following values are supported:
          exacttext	When this flag is present, search pattern completion
        		(e.g., in |/|, |?|, |:s|, |:g|, |:v|, and |:vim|)
        		shows exact buffer text as menu items, without
        		preserving regex artifacts like position
        		anchors (e.g., |/\\<|).  This provides more intuitive
        		menu items that match the actual buffer text.
        		However, searches may be less accurate since the
        		pattern is not preserved exactly.
        		By default, Vim preserves the typed pattern (with
        		anchors) and appends the matched word.  This preserves
        		search correctness, especially when using regular
        		expressions or with 'smartcase' enabled.  However, the
        		case of the appended matched word may not exactly
        		match the case of the word in the buffer.
          fuzzy		Use |fuzzy-matching| to find completion matches.  When
        		this value is specified, wildcard expansion will not
        		be used for completion.  The matches will be sorted by
        		the "best match" rather than alphabetically sorted.
        		This will find more matches than the wildcard
        		expansion.  Currently fuzzy matching based completion
        		is not supported for file and directory names and
        		instead wildcard expansion is used.
          pum		Display the completion matches using the popup menu in
        		the same style as the |ins-completion-menu|.
          tagfile	When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of
        		tag and the file of the tag is listed.	Only one match
        		is displayed per line.  Often used tag kinds are:
        			d	#define
        			f	function

        This option does not apply to |ins-completion|.  See 'completeopt' for
        that.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'wildoptions',
      list = 'onecomma',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('specifies how command line completion is done'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_wop',
      flags_varname = 'wop_flags',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wak',
      defaults = 'menu',
      values = { 'yes', 'menu', 'no' },
      desc = [=[
        		only used in Win32
        Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
        key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
        menu.  This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
        entering special characters.  This option tells what to do:
          no	Don't use ALT keys for menus.  ALT key combinations can be
        	mapped, but there is no automatic handling.
          yes	ALT key handling is done by the windowing system.  ALT key
        	combinations cannot be mapped.
          menu	Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
        	shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system.  Other
        	keys can be mapped.
        If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
        key is never used for the menu.
        This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'winaltkeys',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('when the windows system handles ALT keys'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_wak',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wbr',
      cb = 'did_set_winbar',
      defaults = '',
      desc = [=[
        When non-empty, this option enables the window bar and determines its
        contents. The window bar is a bar that's shown at the top of every
        window with it enabled. The value of 'winbar' is evaluated like with
        'statusline'.

        When changing something that is used in 'winbar' that does not trigger
        it to be updated, use |:redrawstatus|.

        Floating windows do not use the global value of 'winbar'. The
        window-local value of 'winbar' must be set for a floating window to
        have a window bar.

        This option cannot be set in a modeline when 'modelineexpr' is off.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'winbar',
      modelineexpr = true,
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'global', 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('custom format for the window bar'),
      type = 'string',
      varname = 'p_wbr',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'winbl',
      cb = 'did_set_winblend',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Enables pseudo-transparency for a floating window. Valid values are in
        the range of 0 for fully opaque window (disabled) to 100 for fully
        transparent background. Values between 0-30 are typically most useful.

        UI-dependent. Works best with RGB colors. 'termguicolors'
      ]=],
      full_name = 'winblend',
      redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('Controls transparency level for floating windows'),
      type = 'number',
    },
    {
      full_name = 'winborder',
      scope = { 'global' },
      cb = 'did_set_winborder',
      defaults = { if_true = '' },
      values = { '', 'double', 'single', 'shadow', 'rounded', 'solid', 'bold', 'none' },
      desc = [=[
        Defines the default border style of floating windows. The default value
        is empty, which is equivalent to "none". Valid values include:
        - "bold": Bold line box.
        - "double": Double-line box.
        - "none": No border.
        - "rounded": Like "single", but with rounded corners ("╭" etc.).
        - "shadow": Drop shadow effect, by blending with the background.
        - "single": Single-line box.
        - "solid": Adds padding by a single whitespace cell.
        - custom: comma-separated list of exactly 8 characters in clockwise
          order starting from topleft. Example: >lua
             vim.o.winborder='+,-,+,|,+,-,+,|'
        <
      ]=],
      short_desc = N_('border of floating window'),
      type = 'string',
      list = 'onecomma',
      varname = 'p_winborder',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wi',
      cb = 'did_set_window',
      defaults = {
        if_true = 0,
        doc = 'screen height - 1',
      },
      desc = [=[
        Window height used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one
        window and the value is smaller than 'lines' minus one.  The screen
        will scroll 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one.
        When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll
        in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines.
        When resizing the Vim window, and the value is smaller than 1 or more
        than or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1.
        Note: Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window, use
        'lines' for that.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'window',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('nr of lines to scroll for CTRL-F and CTRL-B'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_window',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wfb',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        If enabled, the window and the buffer it is displaying are paired.
        For example, attempting to change the buffer with |:edit| will fail.
        Other commands which change a window's buffer such as |:cnext| will
        also skip any window with 'winfixbuf' enabled.  However if an Ex
        command has a "!" modifier, it can force switching buffers.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'winfixbuf',
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('pin a window to a specific buffer'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wfh',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
        'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.  Set by default for the
        |preview-window| and |quickfix-window|.
        The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'winfixheight',
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('keep window height when opening/closing windows'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wfw',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and
        'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.
        The width may be changed anyway when running out of room.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'winfixwidth',
      redraw = { 'statuslines' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('keep window width when opening/closing windows'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wh',
      cb = 'did_set_winheight',
      defaults = 1,
      desc = [=[
        Minimal number of lines for the current window.  This is not a hard
        minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room.  If the
        focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the
        cost of the height of other windows.
        Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing.
        Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen.
        Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high.  This has the drawback
        that ":all" will create only two windows.  To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4"
        to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done,
        using the |VimEnter| event: >vim
        	au VimEnter * set winheight=999
        <	Minimum value is 1.
        The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the
        height of the current window.
        'winheight' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminheight' to set
        the minimal height for other windows.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'winheight',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines for the current window'),
      tags = { 'E591' },
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_wh',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'winhl',
      cb = 'did_set_winhighlight',
      defaults = '',
      deny_duplicates = true,
      desc = [=[
        Window-local highlights.  Comma-delimited list of highlight
        |group-name| pairs "{hl-from}:{hl-to},..." where each {hl-from} is
        a |highlight-groups| item to be overridden by {hl-to} group in
        the window.

        Note: highlight namespaces take precedence over 'winhighlight'.
        See |nvim_win_set_hl_ns()| and |nvim_set_hl()|.

        Highlights of vertical separators are determined by the window to the
        left of the separator.  The 'tabline' highlight of a tabpage is
        decided by the last-focused window of the tabpage.  Highlights of
        the popupmenu are determined by the current window.  Highlights in the
        message area cannot be overridden.

        Example: show a different color for non-current windows: >vim
        	set winhighlight=Normal:MyNormal,NormalNC:MyNormalNC
        <
      ]=],
      expand_cb = 'expand_set_winhighlight',
      full_name = 'winhighlight',
      list = 'onecommacolon',
      redraw = { 'current_window', 'highlight_only' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('Setup window-local highlights'),
      type = 'string',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wmh',
      cb = 'did_set_winminheight',
      defaults = 1,
      desc = [=[
        The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
        This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
        When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
        status bar) if necessary.  They will return to at least one line when
        they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
        Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
        This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
        large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
        windows.  A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'winminheight',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('minimum number of lines for any window'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_wmh',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wmw',
      cb = 'did_set_winminwidth',
      defaults = 1,
      desc = [=[
        The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
        This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
        When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
        a vertical separator) if necessary.  They will return to at least one
        line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
        to go.)
        Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
        This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
        large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
        windows.  A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'winminwidth',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('minimal number of columns for any window'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_wmw',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wiw',
      cb = 'did_set_winwidth',
      defaults = 20,
      desc = [=[
        Minimal number of columns for the current window.  This is not a hard
        minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room.  If
        the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
        the width of other windows.  Set it to 999 to make the current window
        always fill the screen.  Set it to a small number for normal editing.
        The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
        width of the current window.
        'winwidth' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminwidth' to set
        the minimal width for other windows.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'winwidth',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('minimal number of columns for current window'),
      tags = { 'E592' },
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_wiw',
    },
    {
      cb = 'did_set_wrap',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        This option changes how text is displayed.  It doesn't change the text
        in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
        When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
        displaying continues on the next line.  When off lines will not wrap
        and only part of long lines will be displayed.  When the cursor is
        moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
        horizontally.
        The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary.  See
        'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
        To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >vim
        	set sidescroll=5
        	set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
        <	See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
        This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
        on.
        If 'nowrap' was set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, '>' is used
        as the |lcs-extends| character regardless of the value of the 'list'
        and 'listchars' options.  This is to prevent malicious code outside
        the viewport from going unnoticed.  Use `:setlocal nowrap` manually
        afterwards to disable this behavior.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'wrap',
      redraw = { 'current_window' },
      scope = { 'win' },
      short_desc = N_('lines wrap and continue on the next line'),
      type = 'boolean',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wm',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
        starts.  When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
        and inserting continues on the next line.
        Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
        the text width to be further reduced.
        When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
        See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'wrapmargin',
      scope = { 'buf' },
      short_desc = N_('chars from the right where wrapping starts'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_wm',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'ws',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        Searches wrap around the end of the file.  Also applies to |]s| and
        |[s|, searching for spelling mistakes.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'wrapscan',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('searches wrap around the end of the file'),
      tags = { 'E384', 'E385' },
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_ws',
    },
    {
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        Allows writing files.  When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
        Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
        still allowed.  Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
        argument.  Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
        writing a temporary file.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'write',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('to a file is allowed'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_write',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wa',
      defaults = false,
      desc = [=[
        Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.
      ]=],
      full_name = 'writeany',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('write to file with no need for "!" override'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_wa',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wb',
      defaults = true,
      desc = [=[
        Make a backup before overwriting a file.  The backup is removed after
        the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
        also on.
        WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write
        your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
        lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only reset
        this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write
        fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful).
        See |backup-table| for another explanation.
        When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
        Depending on 'backupcopy' the backup is a new file or the original
        file renamed (and a new file is written).
      ]=],
      full_name = 'writebackup',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('make a backup before overwriting a file'),
      type = 'boolean',
      varname = 'p_wb',
    },
    {
      abbreviation = 'wd',
      defaults = 0,
      desc = [=[
        Only takes effect together with 'redrawdebug'.
        The number of milliseconds to wait after each line or each flush
      ]=],
      full_name = 'writedelay',
      scope = { 'global' },
      short_desc = N_('delay this many msec for each char (for debug)'),
      type = 'number',
      varname = 'p_wd',
    },
  },
}

--- @param o vim.option_meta
local function preprocess(o)
  if o.values then
    o.cb = o.cb or 'did_set_str_generic'
    o.expand_cb = o.expand_cb or 'expand_set_str_generic'
  end

  if type(o.alias) == 'string' then
    o.alias = {
      o.alias --[[@as string]],
    }
  end

  if type(o.defaults) ~= 'table' then
    o.defaults = {
      if_true = o.defaults --[[@as string|boolean|number ]],
    }
  end
end

for _, o in ipairs(options.options) do
  preprocess(o)
end

return options
